JP6514666B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the circumferential surface and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the circumferential surfaces of the plurality of reels A gaming machine (so-called "pachislot") which displays symbols on a display window by stopping all reels by rotating all the reels based on the insertion operation and the start operation to the start lever and stopping each reel based on the player's operation of the stop button. )It has been known. In such a gaming machine, the player is stopped when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as an "effective line") among symbols displayed in the display window. Grant a bonus (for example, a medal) to

  Further, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number and the winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and the reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the operation of the stop button by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted that the combination of a plurality of symbols is displayed on the effective line among the combinations of predetermined symbols.

  At this time, when "losing" is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols which can receive a benefit is not displayed even if the operation of the stop button is performed at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols relating to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line as a stopped combination, or the winning combination is made no matter at which timing the stop button is operated. There is a winning combination in which the combination of such symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

  That is, if it is determined that the winning combination in which the combination of symbols relating to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line is determined to be the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do so, the player is required to have a certain skill and the like regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, in a normal state which is disadvantageous to the player, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state Control to shift to) is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which the probability that the combination of symbols on which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “combination of symbols relating to winnings”) is displayed on the activated line is improved compared to the normal state. If you do not operate the stop button in the appropriate operation sequence (such as "RB (regular bonus)", "BB (big bonus)", "CB (challenge bonus)", "MB (middle bonus)", etc.) When a specific winning combination is decided that the combination of the symbols concerned is not displayed (or the combination of symbols pertaining to the winning with the smaller number of medals paid out is displayed if the stop button is not operated in an appropriate operation order) In addition, "AT (assist time)" in which the operation sequence of the appropriate stop button etc. is informed, and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion More re-game the player is started to improve the probability that is determined as a winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while wishing to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when notifying the transition lottery result to a state advantageous to the player represented by the above specific state, a plurality of timings to be notified are provided, and it is advantageous for the player at the notification timing determined each time. There is a technology for notifying of the transition lottery result to the normal state. (For example, Patent Document 1)

  By configuring in this manner, the notification of the transition lottery result to a state advantageous to the player does not become monotonous, leading to the improvement of the game interest.

JP, 2014-180433, A

  However, although there are a plurality of timings at which to make a notification, since only the notification is made at the determined notification timing, it is difficult to understand the points to be focused on, and there is room for improvement in aiming to further improve the game interest. was there.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has an object to further improve game interest when notifying whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to a player.

In order to solve such problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantage game which is advantageous for the player by establishing a predetermined condition (for example, any one of the first bonus state, the second bonus state, and the third bonus state). And the like. In the gaming machine which determines whether or not to shift to), music data storage means for storing normal music data and reverberation sound data, and the normal music data stored in the music data storage means. Sound output means (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) capable of outputting a sound and a sound based on the reverberation effect data, and the game at a specific timing in a unit game Control means (sub-CPU 401) for notifying the determination result as to whether or not to shift to an advantage game advantageous to the player, and the unit game During the first period (from when the game medium insertion operation is performed until all the stop buttons are operated), the sound output means can output the sound based on the normal music data, the first period It is possible to output a sound based on the reverberation sound data from the sound output means in a second period after the specific timing (from the operation of all the stop buttons until the specific timing). Sound control means (liquid crystal control CPU 601), and the sound output means includes a first specific sound not based on any of the normal music data and the reverberation effect sound data, and the first specific sound Unlike, it is capable of outputting a second specific sound which is not based on any of the conventional music data and the reverberation effect sound data, the sound control unit, in the second period, before And capable of outputting a sound based on the reverberation effect sound data without outputting the first specific sound and the second specific sound, before Symbol certain timing, the first without outputting sound based on the reverberation effect sound data It is characterized in that either a specific sound or the second specific sound can be output.

Further, in order to solve such a problem, the gaming machine according to the present invention is in the bonus game advantageous for the player (for example, the first bonus state, the second bonus state, the third bonus state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Processing for performing reverberation effects on the music data stored in the music data storage means for storing music data and the music data storage means for storing music data, in the game machine which determines whether or not to shift to any Means (liquid crystal control CPU 601), sound output means capable of outputting sound based on the music data stored in the music data storage means and reverberation sound processed by the processing means (upper left speaker 40, lower left part The speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43), and the specific timing in the unit game, it is advantageous for the player Notification control means (sub CPU 401) for notifying the determination result of whether or not to shift to the original game, and the first period in the unit game (from when the game medium insertion operation is performed until all the stop buttons are operated In the second period after the first period until the specific timing is reached (specific timing after all stop buttons are operated). And sound control means (liquid crystal control CPU 601) capable of outputting the reverberation sound processed by the processing means from the sound output means, and the sound output means includes the music data and Unlike the first specific sound not based on any of the reverberation effects and the first specific sound, it may be based on any of the music data and the reverberation effects It is capable of outputting a second specific sound, the sound control unit, in the second period, the reverberation effect sound to enable output without outputting the first specific sound and the second specific sound, pre Symbol It is characterized in that, at a specific timing, either the first specific sound or the second specific sound can be output without outputting the reverberation effect sound .

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, operation means (effect button 21) operable by the player, and operation effective period setting means (sub CPU 401) for setting an operation effective period of the operation means in the second period; May be provided.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the sound output means is determined to shift to the bonus game, the normal data stored in the music data storage means at the specific timing is reached. It may be characterized in that the sound based on the music data is output again.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when it is determined that the sound output means is to shift to the bonus game, the music data stored in the music data storage means at the time when the specific timing is reached. It may be characterized in that the sound based on is emitted again.

  Further, in order to solve such problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface, start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player, and Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the fact that the stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and the winning combination determination means for determining the winning combination and the stop operation means are operated The plurality of reels are variably displayed based on the detection of the start operation by the stop operation detection means to be detected and the start operation detection means, and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. Based on the reel control means for stopping and displaying the plurality of reels; music data storage means for storing normal music data and reverberation effect sound data; and the music data storage means Sound output means (the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right speaker 43) for emitting the sound based on the assumed normal music data and the sound based on the reverberation effect sound data And notification control means for notifying the determination result as to whether or not to shift to a benefit game advantageous to the player (for example, any of the first bonus state, second bonus state, and third bonus state) at a specific timing in the unit game In the sub CPU 401), and in the first period in the unit game (from when the operation of inserting the game medium is performed to when all the stop buttons are operated), the sound based on the normal music data from the sound output means And a second period after the first period until the specific timing (when all stop buttons are operated In leading up) to the timing, from the sound output unit, a sound control unit (liquid crystal control CPU 601) for sound output the sound based on the reverberation effect sound data may be characterized by having a.

  Further, in order to solve such problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface, start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by the player, and Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, the fact that the stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and the winning combination determination means for determining the winning combination and the stop operation means are operated The plurality of reels are variably displayed based on the detection of the start operation by the stop operation detection means to be detected and the start operation detection means, and the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means. Based on the reel control means for stopping and displaying the plurality of reels, music data storage means for storing music data, and the music data stored in the music data storage means. Sound output for emitting a reverberation effect sound processed by the processing means (liquid crystal control CPU 601) that performs processing for applying a reverberation effect, the sound based on the music data stored in the music data storage means, and the reverberation sound processed by the processing means Means (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43), and at a specific timing in the unit game, notifying the determination result of whether to shift to an advantage game advantageous to the player In the notification control means (sub CPU 401) and the first period in the unit game (from when the insertion operation of the game medium is performed until all the stop buttons are operated), the sound output means A second period (all stop buttons are operated after the first period until the specific timing is output after the sound based on the music data is emitted) And sound control means (liquid crystal control CPU 601) for outputting the reverberation sound processed by the processing means from the sound output means). Good.

  Here, "the predetermined condition is satisfied" corresponds to the operation of the operation means by the player, the fact that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the fact that the gaming ball has won a winning opening.

  Further, the "special game" may be any game state as long as it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. For example, a bonus gaming state such as a big bonus or regular bonus, an RT gaming state in which a replay role is established with high probability, an AT state in which an operation order is notified of a specific combination, an ART state including these The ART state is also included) Also, the jackpot device opens for a predetermined time, and the jackpot gaming state in which the game ball can enter the ball, the probability variation gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot gaming state is improved, the opening / closing type prize device There is a short game state etc when time is released with high probability.

  In addition, “unit game” means, for example, changing a symbol by operating the start lever, and allowing one game until the symbol is stopped by operating the stop button, or winning a game ball in the winning opening. The symbol is changed, and 1 change etc. until the change of the symbol stops after the lapse of a predetermined time corresponds.

  The “specific timing” is, for example, a timing set after operating the stop button (after operating all the stop buttons) or after a predetermined time has elapsed after forming the reach.

  The “first period” corresponds to a period from when the game medium insertion operation is performed until all the stop buttons are operated to stop. In addition, after the pattern starts to change, it may be developed as a super reach, and the middle of the developed super reach may be set as the first period.

  Further, the “second period” corresponds to the period from when all the stop buttons are operated to stop until the specific timing is reached. Note that a period from the middle of super reach to the specific timing may be set as the second period.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game when notifying whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to the player.

It is a figure showing an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure showing an example of the back of a front door. It is a figure showing an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable aspect of a presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "00". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of relationship between a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and a prize etc. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 1st RT gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 2nd RT gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 3rd RT gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 4th RT gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 5th RT gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 6th RT gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd winning combination determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a game state shift figure. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the states managed by the sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by the sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a presentation determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state distribution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fake game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-games addition lottery table for ART state. It is a figure which shows an example of a withdrawal lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an additional state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop pre-processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing an example of the game state transition processing in the main control board. FIG. 18 shows an example of RT gaming state transition processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication processing in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing according to command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of processing at the time of condition device command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the chance precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing for Bonus precursor states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st Bonus state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 3rd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st fall standby state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st additional precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st addition preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd fall standby state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd addition precursor states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd preparation preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd addition states in a sub control board. It is a figure showing an example of the processing for the 3rd fall standby state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 4th fall standby state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of display determination command reception in a sub control board. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of processing for preparation for a bonus state when a display determination command is received in the sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st fall fall standby state in the time of display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing for ART preparation states at the time of display determination command reception in a sub control board. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a process for first addition preparation state when a display control command is received in the sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process for 2nd addition preparation states, at the time of display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a process for 2nd fall fall standby states at the time of display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall fall standby states, at the time of display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 4th fall fall standby state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure showing an example of the main processing in a production control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound reproduction control processing in a production control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the channel setting process in a presentation control board. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 3 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 4 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 5 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure showing animation 1 concerning sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 6 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure showing animation 2 concerning sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the volume graph which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 7 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 8 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 9 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 10 which concerns on the sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure showing timing chart 11 concerning sound control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map with respect to the speaker of liquid crystal control CPU in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data based on the priority in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | speech data based on the remaining reproduction time in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data based on the reproduction | regeneration start time in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the overwrite output of the same audio | voice in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which concerns on the overwrite output of the same audio | voice in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which concerns on the alerting | reporting in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the channel state management map explaining the search method of the output stop audio | voice data only by the priority of the audio | voice data in output in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the waveform which concerns on the payout sound in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the principal part of the game machine in 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

First Embodiment
(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a view showing an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. Moreover, FIG. 3 is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of the front door 3. As shown in FIG.

(A game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is composed of a cabinet 2 to be described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. Further, a plurality of parts are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. Further, a plurality of parts are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side in a front view of the cabinet 2 and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so as to be able to open and close.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right of the front door 3 and is provided to unlock the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of the game shop performs maintenance work, changes of setting values, etc., unlocking of a locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is performed. First, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 of the front door 3 and turned clockwise by a predetermined angle to unlock the door. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and maintenance work, change of setting values, and the like are performed. Then, when the maintenance work and the work of changing the setting value are finished, the front door 3 is locked by closing it.

(Medical insertion slot 6)
The medal insertion slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 in a front view, and is provided for the player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided on the left side of the medal insertion slot 6 in a front view, and is provided to use “1” medals of the stored (credited) medals for the game.

(MAX BET button 8)
The MAX BET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 in a front view, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game (the “1” game) among stored (credited) medals It is done. Here, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals usable in one game is "3".

(Settlement button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the back side of the BET button 7 and is provided to perform settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the BET button 7. Further, the start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts the process of acquiring the hard random number and the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 described later. Processing etc.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in a front view. Further, the left stop button 11 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation as a trigger for stopping the rotation of the left reel 18 described later.

(Mid stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 in a front view. Also, the middle stop button 12 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that is a trigger for stopping the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side in a front view of the middle stop button 12. Further, the right stop button 13 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation as a trigger for stopping the rotation of the right reel 20 described later.

(Return button 14)
The return button 14 is provided on the right side of the right stop button 13 in a front view. Further, the return button 14 is provided for returning the clogged medal when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is clogged to the selector 15 described later.

(Selector 15)
The selector 15 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. Further, the selector 15 is provided to determine whether or not the material, the shape, and the like of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 are appropriate.

(Error release sensor 16s)
The error release sensor 16 s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5 and is provided to release an error generated in the gaming machine 1. Here, the error release sensor 16s, which includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5, and rotates the door key (not shown) by a predetermined angle in a counterclockwise direction. The locking portion (not shown) is pivoted. The light receiving unit can not receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit when the locking unit is rotated. As a result, the error release sensor 16 s detects an error release operation for releasing an error generated in the gaming machine 1.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door open / close sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether the front door 3 is open. Here, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is composed of a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5, and the door key (not shown) is locked clockwise when rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle. A part (not shown) will rotate. The light receiving unit can not receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit when the locking unit is rotated. Thus, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a line on the sheet. Then, the left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is attached to the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is rotationally driven by a middle stepping motor 152 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is attached to the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. Then, the right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Effect button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAX BET button 8 in a front view, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Further, the effect button 21 is connected to an effect button sensor 710s described later. Here, when the effect button sensor 710s described later detects the operation of the effect button 21, the sub control substrate 400 described later controls the liquid crystal display device 46 described later via the effect control substrate 600 described later. .

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side in a front view of the effect button 21 and includes an upward button, a downward button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. It is done. In addition, a cross key board 711 described later is connected to the cross key 22. When the cross key substrate 711 described later detects an operation of the cross key 22, the sub control substrate 400 described later controls the liquid crystal display device 46 described later via the effect control substrate 600 described later.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the circumferential surface of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 can be viewed. It is provided to Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the circumferential surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the circumferential surface of the middle reel 19, and a circumferential surface of the right reel 20 A total of "9" symbols can be viewed through the display window 23 in "3" symbols.

(Start lamp 24)
The start lamp 24 is provided above the BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether it is possible to receive a start operation by the start lever 10. Specifically, the main control board 300, which will be described later, is operated when the number of medals used in the game becomes "3" by the operation of the BET button 7 and the MAX BET button 8, or "3" in the medal insertion slot 6. When the medals are inserted, when the combination of symbols related to "Replay" described later is displayed on the effective line in the previous game, the start lamp 24 is turned on to start operation by the start lever 10 Processing to notify that it is possible to receive

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed in the display window 23, the effective line is the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Only the "right-down line" connecting the symbols displayed in the lower part of the line by a straight line is considered as the effective line.

  Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed in the display window 23, (a) the symbol displayed in the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 The line connecting the symbols displayed in the upper row by a straight line is called the “upper row”, and (b) the symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 The line that connects the symbols displayed in the middle of the line by a straight line is called the "middle line", and (c) the symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the lower part of the middle reel 19, and the right reel The line connecting the symbols displayed in the lower part of 20 with a straight line is called "lower line", and (d) the symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the right The symbol displayed on the top of the reel 20 is straight The do's line of "upward-sloping line". The effective line may be the upper line, middle line, lower line, upper right line instead of the lower right line, and in addition to the lower right line, the upper line, middle line, lower line, upper right You may apply a line.

(1st BET lamp 25)
The first BET lamp 25 is provided on the right side of the start lamp 24 in a front view, and is provided to notify that the number of BETs is “1”. Specifically, the main control board 300, which will be described later, BETs when "1" or more medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, or in a state where "1" or more medals are stored (credits). When the button 7 or the MAX BET button 8 is operated, the first BET lamp 25 is lit.

(2nd BET lamp 26)
The second BET lamp 26 is provided above the first BET lamp 25 and is provided to notify that the number of BETs is “2”. Specifically, the main control board 300, which will be described later, BETs when "2 or more" medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, or in a state where "2 or more" medals are stored (credits). When the button 7 is operated "2" times, the second BET lamp 26 is turned on.

(3rd BET lamp 27)
The third BET lamp 27 is provided above the second BET lamp 26, and is provided to notify that the number of BETs is "3". Specifically, the main control board 300 described later has a MAX BET button when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or in a state where “3” or more medals are stored (credits). When 8 is operated, the processing of lighting the third BET lamp 27 is performed when, for example, a combination of symbols relating to “Replay” described later is displayed on the activated line in the previous game.

(Reserved number indicator 28)
The storage quantity indicator 28 is provided on the right side of the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, and the third BET lamp 27 in a front view. Further, the stored number indicator 28 is provided to display the stored (credited) number of medals of the player stored (credited) in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number indicator 29)
The number-of-payouts indicator 29 is provided on the right side of the stored number indicator 28 in a front view. Further, the payout number indicator 29 is provided to display the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line. Further, when the gaming machine 1 is in the error state, the payout number display 29 indicates that the error state is entered.

(Displayable indicator lamp 30)
The turnable display lamp 30 is provided on the right side in a front view of the payout number display 29. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of lighting the insertable display lamp 30 when receiving the insertion of the medal by the medal insertion slot 6. On the other hand, when the main control board 300 described later does not receive the insertion of the medal through the medal insertion slot 6, the main control board 300 performs a process of turning off the insertion possible display lamp 30. As a result, the player is notified by the medal insertion slot 6 whether or not the medal insertion is accepted.

(Replay display lamp 31)
The replay indicator lamp 31 is provided below the insertable indicator lamp 30. Here, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of lighting the replay indicator lamp 31 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, the main control board 300 described later displays a combination of symbols related to "Replay" described later on the active line in the next game in which a combination of symbols related to "Replay" described later is displayed on the effective line. If not, the process of turning off the replay indicator lamp 31 is performed. In this way, it is informed that the combination of symbols relating to "replay" is displayed on the activated line, and that it is possible to play the next game without using the medal.

(Bonus display section 32)
The Bonus display unit 32 is provided on the right side of the display window 23 in a front view. In addition, the Bonus display unit 32 is provided with an LED. Here, when the sub-control board 400 described later is managed by the sub-control board 400 described below is in the Bonus state, the sub-control board 400 described later via the control panel relay board 700 described later and the bonus display LED board 705 described below. A process of lighting an LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided in the bonus display unit 32 via the control panel LED relay board 700 described later and the bonus display LED board 705 described later when the bonus state described later is ended. Do the process of As a result, the player is notified of the transition to the Bonus state and the fact that the player has ended the Bonus state.

(ART display unit 33)
The ART display unit 33 is provided below the Bonus display unit 32. In addition, the ART display unit 33 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by a later-described sub-control substrate 400 becomes an ART state, a later-described sub-control substrate 400 is via an after-mentioned control panel LED relay substrate 700 and an later-described ART display LED substrate 706. A process of lighting the LED provided on the ART display unit 33 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided in the ART display section 33 via the control panel LED relay board 700 described later and the ART display LED board 706 described later when the ART state described later ends. Do the process of As a result, the player is notified of the transition to the ART state and the player is notified of the termination of the ART state.

(RUSH indicator 34)
The RUSH display unit 34 is provided on the left side of the display window 23 in a front view. Further, the RUSH display unit 34 is provided with an LED. Here, the sub control board 400 described later, when the state managed by the sub control substrate 400 described later becomes the first superimposed state, the control panel LED relay substrate 700 described later and the RUSH display LED substrate 707 described later. A process of lighting the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later is an LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via the control panel LED relay board 700 described later and the RUSH display LED board 707 described later when the first added state described later is finished. To turn off the light. As a result, the player is notified of the transition to the first additional state and the fact that the first additional state has ended for the player.

(Stop button operation display unit 35)
The stop button operation display unit 35 is provided below the RUSH display unit 34, and (a) the left stop button operation display unit 35L emits light at timing when it is optimal to operate the left stop button 11; ) Middle stop button operation display unit 35C emitting light at timing when it is optimum to operate middle stop button 12; (c) Right stop button operation display emitting when it is optimum to operate right stop button 13 It comprises the section 35R, and is provided to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Further, each of the left stop button operation display unit 35L, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C, and the right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided with an LED. Thereby, when the state managed by the below-mentioned sub control board 400 is an ART state, the notification of the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed.

(Left stop button operation display unit 35L)
The left stop button operation display unit 35L is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. Here, when the state controlled by the sub control substrate 400 described later is the ART state, the sub control substrate 400 described later has an optimum timing when operating the left stop button 11. A process is performed to light the LEDs provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the control panel LED relay substrate 700 and the stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later. On the other hand, in the case where the left stop button 11 is operated after the sub control board 400 described later performs a process of lighting the LED provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L in the ART state described later. A process of turning off the LED provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the later-described control panel LED relay substrate 700 and the stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later is performed. In this way, it is informed that it is the optimum timing to operate the left stop button 11.

(Mid stop button operation display unit 35C)
The middle stop button operation display unit 35C is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12. Here, when the state controlled by the sub control substrate 400 described later is the ART state, the sub control substrate 400 described later has an optimum timing when the middle stop button 12 is operated. A process is performed to light the LEDs provided in the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via the control panel LED relay substrate 700 and the stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later. On the other hand, in the case where the sub-control board 400 described later performs a process of lighting the LED provided in the middle-stop button operation display unit 35C in the ART state described later, the middle-stop button 12 is operated. A process is performed to turn off the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via a control panel LED relay substrate 700 described later and a stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later. In this way, it is informed that it is the optimum timing to operate the middle stop button 12.

(Right stop button operation display unit 35R)
The right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided to notify that it is the optimum timing to operate the right stop button 13. Here, when the state controlled by the sub control substrate 400 described later is the ART state, the sub control substrate 400 described later has an optimum timing when the right stop button 13 is operated. A process is performed to light the LEDs provided in the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the control panel LED relay substrate 700 and the stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later. On the other hand, in the case where the right stop button 13 is operated after the sub control board 400 described later performs a process of lighting the LED provided in the right stop button operation display unit 35R in the ART state described later. A process of turning off the LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the later-described control panel LED relay substrate 700 and the stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later is performed. In this way, it is informed that it is the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Therefore, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 described later is the ART state, notification of the optimum operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed.

(Start lever LED 36)
The start lever LED 36 is provided inside the start lever 10. Here, the sub control board 400 described later performs processing of lighting or blinking the start lever LED 36 via a control panel LED relay board 700 described later and a start lever LED board 709 described later at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to perform visual effects on the player.

(Lumbar panel 37)
The lumbar panel 37 is provided below the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and is provided to allow the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Payment unit 38)
The tray unit 38 is provided below the lumbar panel 37. Further, the tray unit 38 is provided to receive and store the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 39 described later.

(Medal payout 39)
The medal payout opening 39 is provided below the lumbar panel 37, and is provided to discharge a medal to be paid out by the hopper 202, which will be described later, when the medal is paid out. Further, the medal payout opening 39 is provided for discharging an incorrect medal when it is determined that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not a proper medal by a selector sensor 15s described later. Furthermore, when the medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 at a time when it is impossible to receive the insertion of the medal, the medal payout opening 39 is inserted at the time when it is impossible to receive the insertion of the medal. It is provided to discharge medals.

(Top left speaker 40)
The upper left speaker 40 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. Further, the upper left speaker 40 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects and the like when effecting.

(Lower left speaker 41)
The lower left speaker 41 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower left speaker 41 is provided to output BGM, sound, sound effects and the like when performing effects.

(Top right speaker 42)
The upper right speaker 42 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper right speaker 42 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, and the like when performing effects.

(Lower right speaker 43)
The lower right speaker 43 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower right speaker 43 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, and the like when performing effects.

(Setting display unit 44)
The setting display unit 44 is provided on a main control board 300 described later, and is provided to display setting values of the gaming machine 1. Here, the main control board 300 described later is currently set when it is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with the setting change key (not shown) inserted in the setting change key hole 48 described later. A process of displaying the setting value on the setting display unit 44 is performed.

(Settings change button 45)
The setting change button 45 is provided on a setting switch substrate 250 described later, and is provided to change a setting value. Here, the main control board 300 described later is displayed on the setting display unit 44 when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting display unit 44. Performs processing to switch and display the set value. The set value currently set is displayed on the setting display unit 44 when the setting change key switch 49 sw described later is turned on. Then, when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected in a state where the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of fixing the setting value. . When an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of canceling the error based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 45 has (a) a function of switching the setting value and (b) a function of canceling an error.

  In the present embodiment, the set values are set from the set “1” to the set “6” of the set “6”. Therefore, when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected while the information indicating that the setting is "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the setting indicating that the setting is "2" is displayed on the setting display unit 44. Information is displayed, and thereafter, each time the setting change button 45 is operated, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44 is displayed by adding “1” at a time. However, when the setting change button 45 is operated in a state where information indicating that the setting is "6" is displayed on the setting display unit 44, information indicating that the setting is "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 44. It will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value is set to the setting value of the “6” step of the setting “1” to the setting “6”, but is not limited to this. For example, the set value may be "2" or "3", "4" or "5".

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to display moving images / still images and the like. Here, when the sub control board 400 described later is managed by the sub control board 400 described later is the ART state, “push order bell A1 to A4” or “push order bell” is generated by the internal lottery process described later. A process of displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600 when any of “B1 to B4” is determined Do.

(External concentrated terminal board 47)
The external concentrated terminal board 47 is provided on the lower right side of the setting switch board 250, which will be described later, in a front view right direction, and is used for (a) the number of medals used for playing a game outside the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown). (B) a medal payout signal capable of specifying the number of medals paid out to the player, (c) that the state managed by the sub control board 400 described later has shifted to the ART state (D) A bonus status signal capable of identifying that the status managed by the sub control substrate 400 described below has shifted to the bonus status, (e) managed by the sub control substrate 400 described below A first additional status signal that can identify that the status has transitioned to the first additional status, and (f) a security signal that can identify that fraudulent activity has occurred. It is.

  Here, more specifically, the "ART status signal" is a signal output when the status managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the fourth RT gaming status, and the "Bonus status signal" is, A signal output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the third RT gaming state, and the "first additional state signal" is a state managed by the main control board 300 in the fifth RT gaming state. It is a signal output when transitioning.

(Key hole for setting change 48)
The setting change key hole 48 is provided in a setting switch substrate 250 described later, and is provided to change a setting value. In addition, a setting change key switch 49sw described later for detecting that the setting change key (not shown) has been rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with the setting change key (not shown) inserted in the setting change key hole 48 Is provided.

(Effect device 50)
The rendering device 50 is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, when it is determined that the sub control board 400 can move the rendering device 50, the sub control board 400 can move the rendering device 50 in the vertical direction via the effect control board 600 and the rendering device drive board 650. Do. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect appealing to the player visually.

(Status board 100)
The status substrate 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. In the status board 100, a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAX BET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a medium stop switch 12sw described later, a right stop described later Switch 13 sw, selector sensor 15 s described later, error release sensor 16 s, door open / close sensor 17 s, start lamp 24, first BET lamp 25, second BET lamp 26, third BET lamp 27, stored number indicator 28, dispensed number indicator 29, The insertable display lamp 30, the replay display lamp 31, and the main control board 300 are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . In the reel control board 150, a left stepping motor 151 described later, a middle stepping motor 152 described later, a right stepping motor 153 described later, a left reel sensor 154s described later, a middle reel sensor 155s described later, a right reel sensor 156s described later , And the main control board 300 are connected.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided to control the left reel 18. In addition, the left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a designated angle. Thus, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after detecting the reel index.

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided to control the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a designated angle. Thus, the middle reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after detecting the reel index.

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided to control the right reel 20. In addition, the right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a designated angle. Thus, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154 s is provided inside the left reel 18 and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has been rotated by "1".

(Middle reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The middle reel sensor 155 s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has been rotated by “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. Further, the right reel sensor 156 s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has been rotated by “1”.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply substrate 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side in a front view, and is provided to perform control to supply power to the gaming machine 1. In addition, a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, an auxiliary storage sensor 203s described later, and a main control board 300 are connected to the power supply substrate 200.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side in a front view of the hopper 202 described later, and is provided to perform an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply substrate 200 in a front view, and is provided to pay out the medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300 described later performs processing for driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the effective line, and the medal for the player Process to pay out.

(Auxiliary storage 203)
The auxiliary storage container 203 is provided on the right side in a front view of the hopper 202, and is provided to store the overflowed medal when the medal stored in the hopper 202 overflows.

(Setting switch board 250)
The setting switch substrate 250 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the upper right side in a front view of the cabinet 2. Further, a setting change switch 45 sw described later and a setting change key switch 49 sw described later are connected to the setting switch substrate 250.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side of the setting switch board 250 in a front view, and is provided to control the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 further includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, to the main control board 300, a setting display unit 44, an external concentrated terminal board 47, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 described later are connected.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 in a front view, and is provided mainly for controlling effects. The sub control board 400 further includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Further, to the sub control board 400, a main control board 300, a backlight relay board 450 described later, an effect control board 600 described later, and a control panel relay board 700 described later are connected.

(Backlight relay board 450)
The backlight relay substrate 450 is provided below the main control substrate 300, and relays the sub control substrate 400, a left backlight substrate 451, which will be described later, a middle backlight substrate 452, which will be described later, and a right backlight substrate 453, which will be described later. It is provided to Further, to the backlight relay substrate 450, a sub control substrate 400, a left backlight substrate 451, which will be described later, a middle backlight substrate 452, which will be described later, and a right backlight substrate 453, which will be described later are connected.

(Left backlight board 451)
The left backlight substrate 451 is provided inside the left reel 18, and a left backlight 461, which will be described later, is connected. The left backlight substrate 451 is provided to perform light emission control of a left backlight 461 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

  In FIG. 2, the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, the right stepping motor 153, the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, the right reel sensor 156s, the left backlight substrate 451, the middle backlight substrate 452, and the right In order to explain the backlight substrate 453, the illustration of the sheets mounted on the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 is omitted.

(Medium back light board 452)
The middle backlight substrate 452 is provided inside the middle reel 19, and a middle backlight 462, which will be described later, is connected. The middle backlight substrate 452 is provided to control light emission of the middle backlight 462, which will be described later, from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

(Right backlight board 453)
The right backlight substrate 453 is provided inside the right reel 20, and a right backlight 463, which will be described later, is connected. Further, the right backlight substrate 453 is provided to perform light emission control of a right backlight 463, which will be described later, from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier substrate 500 is provided above the upper left speaker 40, and outputs BGM data, audio data, sound effect data, and the like from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43. It is provided to perform control. In addition, the amplifier board 500 is connected with an upper left speaker 40, a lower left speaker 41, an upper right speaker 42, a lower right speaker 43, and a presentation control board 600 described later.

(Effect control board 600)
The effect control board 600 is provided above the back of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for performing effects. Further, the effect control board 600 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 601 described later, a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later, a liquid crystal control RAM 603 described later, a CGROM 604 described later, a sound source IC 605 described later, a sound source ROM 606 described later, and a VDP 607 described later. Further, to the effect control substrate 600, a liquid crystal display device 46, an amplifier substrate 500, and an effect device drive substrate 650 described later are connected.

(Rendering device drive board 650)
The rendering device drive substrate 650 is provided below the rendering device drive relay substrate 750 described later, and is provided to perform control to move the rendering device 50. In addition, the rendering device drive substrate 650 includes a rendering device 50, a rendering control substrate 600, a left rendering device motor 651 described later, an upper left rendering device sensor 652s described later, a lower left rendering device sensor 653s described below, a right rendering device motor 654 described later Upper left effect device sensor 655s described later, lower right effect device sensor 656s described later, left liquid crystal lift motor 657 described later, upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s described later, lower liquid crystal lift sensor 659s described later, right liquid crystal lift motor 660 described later An upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s described later, a lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s described later, and a rendering device drive relay substrate 750 described later are connected.

(Control panel LED relay board 700)
The control panel LED relay substrate 700 is provided above the lower left speaker 41, and the sub control substrate 400, the MAX BET button LED substrate 701 described later, the stop button LED substrate 702 described later, the effect button LED substrate 703 described later, and Waist panel LED board 704, Bonus display LED board 705 described later, ART display LED board 706 described later, RUSH display LED board 707 described later, stop button operation LED board 708 described later, start lever LED board 709 described later, described later The effect button sensor 710 s is provided to relay a cross key board 711 described later. In addition, the control panel LED relay substrate 700 includes a sub control substrate 400, a MAX BET button LED substrate 701 described later, a stop button LED substrate 702 described later, a presentation button LED substrate 703 described later, a waist panel LED substrate 704 described later, Bonus display LED board 705, ART display LED board 706 described later, RUSH display LED board 707 described later, stop button operation LED board 708 described later, start lever LED board 709 described later, effect button sensor 710s described later, cross key described later The substrate 711 is connected.

(Demonstrator drive relay board 750)
The effect device drive relay substrate 750 is provided above the effect control substrate 600, and is provided to relay the effect device drive substrate 650, the effect device control substrate 800 described later, and the LED control substrate 850 described later. . Further, the rendering device drive relay substrate 750 is connected to a rendering device drive substrate 650, a rendering device control substrate 800 described later, and an LED control substrate 850 described later.

(Top LED board 851)
The top LED substrate 851 is provided above the effect control substrate 600 and is provided to control a top LED 861 described later. Further, a top LED 861, which will be described later, is connected to the top LED substrate 851.

(Corner LED board 852)
The corner LED substrates 852 are provided on the left and right sides of the effect device drive relay substrate 750, and are provided to control the corner LEDs 862 described later. In addition, a corner LED 862 described later is connected to the corner LED substrate 852.

(Side LED board 853)
The side LED substrate 853 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on both left and right sides of the display window 23, and is provided to control the side LED 863 described later. Further, a side LED 863 described later is connected to the side LED substrate 853.

(Sink side LED board 854)
The saucer side LED substrate 854 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and outside the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43, and is provided to control the sauce side LED 864 described later. ing. Further, a saucer side LED 864 described later is connected to the saucer side LED substrate 854.

(Receiver LED board 855)
The saucer LED substrate 855 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on the back side of the saucer unit 38, and is provided to control the sauce LED 865 described later. Further, a saucer LED 865 described later is connected to the saucer LED substrate 855.

(Top LED 861)
The top LED 861 is provided above the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, the top LED 861 is designed and designed to have a shape, a color, a pattern, a pattern, and the like that appeal to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs processing of lighting and blinking the top LED 861 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the top LED board 851. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect appealing to the player visually.

(Corner LED 862)
The corner LEDs 862 are provided on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, the corner LED 862 is designed and designed to have a shape, a color, a pattern, a pattern, and the like that appeal to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs processing of lighting and blinking the corner LED 862 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the corner LED board 852. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect appealing to the player visually.

(Side LED 863)
The side LEDs 863 are provided at the left and right ends of the gaming machine 1. In addition, the side LED 863 is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern, etc. that appeals to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs processing of lighting and blinking the side LED 863 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the side LED board 853. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect appealing to the player visually.

(Receiver side LED 864)
The saucer side LED 864 is provided below the side LED 863. In addition, the tray side LED 864 is designed and designed by giving a shape, a color, a pattern, a pattern or the like that appeals to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer side LED 864 via the effect control board 600, the presentation device drive board 650, the presentation device drive relay board 750, and the saucer side LED board 854. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect appealing to the player visually.

(Receiver LED 865)
The saucer LED 865 is provided on the front side of the saucer unit 38 in a front view. Also, the tray LED 865 is designed and designed to have a shape, a color, a pattern, a pattern, etc. that appeal to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer LED 865 via the effect control board 600, the presentation device drive board 650, the presentation device drive relay board 750, and the tray LED board 855. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect appealing to the player visually.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls the main operation of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7 sw)
The BET switch 7 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the BET switch 7 sw detects the operation of the BET button 7. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the medals stored (credited).

(MAX BET switch 8 sw)
The MAX BET switch 8 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAX BET button 8. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the MAX BET button 8 is detected by the MAX BET switch 8 sw. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using "3" medals from the medals stored (credited).

(Settlement switch 9 sw)
The settlement switch 9 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9 sw. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of clearing the stored (credited) medals. Specifically, the main control board 300 transmits, to the power supply board 200, a signal indicating that the stored (credited) medals are to be returned. Then, the power supply substrate 200 drives the hopper 202 to perform processing for returning the stored (credited) medals.

(Start switch 10 sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10 sw, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status substrate 100, the main control substrate 300 performs processing such as starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the left stop switch 11 sw detects the operation of the left stop button 11. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status substrate 100, the main control substrate 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating left reel 18.

(Medium stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12 sw. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status substrate 100, the main control substrate 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating middle reel 19.

(Right stop switch 13 sw)
The right stop switch 13 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the right stop switch 13 sw detects an operation of the right stop button 13. Then, based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the status substrate 100, the main control substrate 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating right reel 20.

(Selector sensor 15s)
The selector sensor 15 s is a sensor for detecting that a proper medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the passage of a normal medal is detected by the selector sensor 15s. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 is used for (a) processing of adding "1" to the number of medals to be stored (credited), and (b) playing a game. A process is performed to add "1" to the number of medals to be played.

(Setting change switch 45 sw)
The setting change switch 45 sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the setting change button 45. Here, when the setting change switch 45 sw detects the operation of the setting change button 45, the setting switch board 250 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300. Then, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch substrate 250, the main control substrate 300 performs a process of updating and displaying the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44.

(Setting change key switch 49sw)
The setting change key switch 49 sw is a switch for detecting that it has been rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. Here, when the setting switch board 250 is detected to be rotated by a predetermined angle in a state in which the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48, the setting switch board 250 transmits to the main control board 300. And transmit a predetermined signal. Then, based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the setting switch substrate 250, the main control substrate 300 performs a process of displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201 sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, when the power switch 201 sw detects the operation of the power button 201, the power supply substrate 200 performs processing for supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Auxiliary storage sensor 203s)
The auxiliary storage sensor 203s is a sensor for detecting that the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. Here, when the auxiliary storage sensor 203s detects that the medal stored in the auxiliary storage 203 is full, the power supply substrate 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control substrate 300. . Then, based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the power supply substrate 200, the main control substrate 300 performs error processing when the medals stored in the auxiliary storage container 203 are full.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in the main ROM 302 described later, and performs predetermined arithmetic processing as the game progresses, thereby the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, the sub control board Send a predetermined signal to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main ROM 302 is provided to store a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 is a sequence data table (see FIG. 6) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 7) whose symbol combination group described later is "00", and a symbol whose symbol combination group described later is "01". A combination table (see FIG. 8), a symbol combination table (see FIG. 9) whose symbol combination group described later is “02”, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 10) whose symbol combination group described later is “03”, a symbol combination described later A symbol combination table with a group of "04" (see FIG. 11), a first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 13), a first winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state described later (FIG. 14). See below), the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 15), and the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 16). ), The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 17), the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 18), the first winning for the sixth RT gaming state described later A combination determination table (see FIG. 19), a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) described later, and the like are stored.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided to store various data determined by execution of a program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with, for example, various counters such as the input sheet number counter, and various storage areas such as the setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main random number generator 304 is provided to generate a random number used in a lottery for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates random number values in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in the sub ROM 402 described later, and is determined based on information of a command received from the main control board 300, a signal input from the effect button sensor 710s, or the cross key board 711. In order to supply the result of the calculation to the effect control board 600, the amplifier board 500 and the like, the calculation of

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided to store a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 is an effect determination table described later (see FIG. 24), a bonus preparation state transition lottery table described later (see FIG. 25), a bonus state allocation lottery table described later (see FIG. 26), and The prognostic game number determination table (see FIG. 27), the chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, the fake game number determination table described below (see FIG. 29), the promoted lottery table described below (see FIG. 30) The ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31), the number of ART state game addition lottery table (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, the pullback lottery table (see FIG. 33), which will be described later Reference etc. are stored.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided to store various data determined by execution of a program by the sub CPU 401. Specifically, the sub RAM 403 is provided with, for example, various counters such as a bonus precursor state game number counter and various storage areas such as a state storage area.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub random number generator 404 is provided to generate a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining an effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub random number generator 404 generates random number values in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Left backlight 461)
The left backlight 461 is provided on the left backlight substrate 451 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control substrate 400 performs a process of causing the left backlight 461 to emit light via the backlight relay substrate 450 and the left backlight substrate 451. This facilitates visual recognition of the symbol of the left reel 18.

(Backlight 462)
The middle backlight 462 is provided on the middle backlight substrate 452 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control substrate 400 performs a process of causing the middle backlight 462 to emit light via the backlight relay substrate 450 and the middle backlight substrate 452. Thereby, visual recognition of the symbol of the inside reel 19 becomes easy.

(Right backlight 463)
The right backlight 463 is provided on the right backlight substrate 453 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control substrate 400 performs a process of causing the right backlight 463 to emit light via the backlight relay substrate 450 and the right backlight substrate 453. Thereby, visual recognition of the symbol of the right reel 20 becomes easy.

(Liquid crystal control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided to read a program stored in a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later, and create a display list based on signals received from the sub control board 400. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 also controls the liquid crystal display device 46 to display image data stored in the CGROM 604 described later.

(Liquid crystal control ROM 602)
The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided to store a control program executed by the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the liquid crystal control ROM 602 is a program for control processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes referred to when displaying an animation, and a display order of animation scenes. A weight frame indicating display time of an image, various target data such as sprite identification number and transfer source address, various parameters such as display position and transfer destination address of sprite, and drawing method are stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 603)
The liquid crystal control RAM 603 is provided on the effect control board 600. Further, the liquid crystal control RAM 603 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 601, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 602. Also, for example, in the liquid crystal control RAM 603, channel information storage for grasping audio data output from each channel of the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) An area is provided. The channel information storage area is provided with a storage area for a channel state management map, which will be described later, and further stores an output target free channel, an output stop target channel, an output stop channel, etc. used for searching for free channels and stop channels. An area is also provided.

(CGROM 604)
The CGROM 604 is provided on the effect control board 600. The CGROM 604 is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels) and an α value indicating transparency of the image. It is provided to compress and store image data consisting of a set.

(Sound source IC 605)
The sound source IC 605 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source IC 605 also reads a program and data related to voice stored in the sound source ROM 606 described later, and generates an audio signal for driving the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43. Provided for

(Sound source ROM 606)
The sound source ROM 606 is provided on the effect control board 600. Further, the sound source ROM 606 is provided to store programs, data, and the like related to the sound that is output when the effect is performed. In the sound source ROM 606, along with the sound data for presentation, the priority of the output of the sound data and the reproduction time are stored.

(VDP 607)
The VDP 607 is a so-called image processor, and performs control of reading out image data from the “display frame buffer area” of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 601. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated to perform control to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 46. The VDP 607 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Left production device motor 651)
The left effect device motor 651 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. Further, the left effect device motor 651 is provided to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction together with a right effect device motor 654 described later.

(Upper left production device sensor 652s)
The upper left rendering device sensor 652 s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left rendering device sensor 652 s is provided to detect that the rendering device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the rendering device 50 is moved upward together with the upper right rendering device sensor 655 s described later. .

(Low left effect device sensor 653s)
The lower left rendering device sensor 653 s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. In addition, the lower left rendering device sensor 653s is provided to detect that the rendering device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the rendering device 50 is moved downward together with the lower right rendering device sensor 656s described later. There is.

(Right production device motor 654)
The right rendering device motor 654 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The right effect device motor 654 is provided for moving the effect device 50 in the vertical direction together with the left effect device motor 651.

(Upper right production device sensor 655s)
The upper right rendering device sensor 655 s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right rendering device sensor 655 s is provided to detect that the rendering device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the rendering device 50 is moved upward together with the upper left rendering device sensor 652 s.

(Low-right effect device sensor 656s)
The lower right rendering device sensor 656 s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right rendering device sensor 656 s is provided to detect that the rendering device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the rendering device 50 is moved downward together with the lower left rendering device sensor 653 s.

(Left liquid crystal lifting motor 657)
The left liquid crystal lift motor 657 is connected to the effect device drive substrate 650. Further, the left liquid crystal lifting motor 657 is provided to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction together with a right liquid crystal lifting motor 660 described later.

(Upper left LCD lift sensor 658s)
The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658 s is connected to the effect device drive substrate 650. The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is provided to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward along with the upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s described later. ing.

(Low left LCD lift sensor 659s)
The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659 s is connected to the effect device drive substrate 650. The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is provided to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward, together with the lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s described later. It is done.

(Right LCD lift motor 660)
The right liquid crystal lift motor 660 is connected to the rendering device drive substrate 650. The right liquid crystal lift motor 660 is provided together with the left liquid crystal lift motor 657 to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right LCD lift sensor 661s)
The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661 s is connected to the rendering device drive substrate 650. The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is provided to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward together with the upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s. .

(Lower right LCD lift sensor 662s)
The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662 s is connected to the rendering device drive substrate 650. Further, the lower right liquid crystal elevation sensor 662s is provided to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward together with the lower left liquid crystal elevation sensor 659s. There is.

(MAX BET button LED board 701)
A MAX BET button LED substrate 701 is connected to a MAX BET button LED 721 described later, and is provided to perform a process of emitting a MAX BET button LED 721 described later. Here, when the operation of the MAX BET button 8 is effective, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting a MAX BET button LED 721, which will be described later, via the MAX BET button LED board 701 of the control panel relay board 700. In this way, notification that the operation of the MAX BET button 8 is effective is performed.

(Stop button LED board 702)
The stop button LED substrate 702 is connected to a stop button LED 722, which will be described later, and is provided to perform a process of emitting a stop button LED 722, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting a stop button LED 722 described later via the stop button LED board 702 of the control panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, when the left stop button 11 is effective, the sub control board 400 emits a stop button LED 722 described later provided inside the left stop button 11 via the stop button LED board 702. When the middle stop button 12 is valid, the stop button LED 722 described later provided inside the middle stop button 12 is emitted via the stop button LED substrate 702, and the right stop button 13 is valid. In the case where there is a stop button LED substrate 702, processing for emitting a stop button LED 722, which will be described later provided inside the right stop button 13, is performed. Thereby, notification that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is effective is performed.

(Effective button LED board 703)
The effect button LED substrate 703 is connected to an effect button LED 723 to be described later, and is provided to perform processing for emitting an effect button LED 723 to be described later. Here, when the operation of the effect button 21 is effective, the sub control substrate 400 performs a process of emitting the effect button LED 723 described later via the effect button LED substrate 703 of the control panel relay substrate 700. Thereby, notification that the operation of the effect button 21 is effective is performed.

(Lumbar panel LED board 704)
The waist panel LED substrate 704 is connected to a waist panel LED 724 to be described later, and is provided to perform a process of emitting light to the waist panel LED 724 to be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light from a waist panel LED 724 described later via the waist panel LED substrate 704 of the control panel LED relay substrate 700. This makes it easy for the player to recognize the model name, motif, etc. of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the lumbar panel.

(Bonus display LED board 705)
The bonus display LED substrate 705 is connected to the bonus display unit 32 and is provided to perform a process of emitting an LED provided in the bonus display unit 32. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the bonus display section 32 via the bonus display LED board 705 of the control panel relay board 700 at the timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the bonus state. Perform processing to emit light from the LED. In this way, notification of the transition to the later-described Bonus state is performed.

(ART display LED board 706)
The ART display LED substrate 706 is connected to the ART display unit 33, and is provided to perform a process of emitting an LED provided in the ART display unit 33. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the ART display portion 33 via the ART display LED board 706 of the control panel relay board 700 at the timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the ART state. Perform processing to emit light from the LED. In this way, notification of transition to an ART state described later is performed.

(RUSH display LED board 707)
The RUSH display LED substrate 707 is connected to the RUSH display unit 34, and is provided to perform a process of emitting the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via the RUSH display LED board 707 of the control panel relay board 700 at the timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the first overlay state. Process to emit light from the LED. In this way, notification of the shift to the first additional state described later is performed.

(Stop button operation LED board 708)
The stop button operation LED board 708 is connected to the stop button operation display unit 35, and is provided to perform a process of emitting an LED provided in the stop button operation display unit 35. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light of the LED provided in the stop button operation display unit 35 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the control panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, when the state controlled by the sub control board 400 is the ART state described later, the sub control board 400 controls LED when the left stop button 11 is at the optimum timing. If it is the best time to operate the middle stop button 12 by turning on the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35 L via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the relay substrate 700, the control panel When it is the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13 by lighting the LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the LED relay substrate 700, On the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the control panel LED relay substrate 700 The process of lighting the vignetting in which LED performs. Thereby, notification of the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed.

(Start lever LED board 709)
The start lever LED substrate 709 is connected to the start lever LED 36, and is provided to perform a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36 at a predetermined timing via the start lever LED board 709 of the control panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player is performed.

(Effect button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect the operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 710 s transmits a predetermined signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key substrate 711 is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect an operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key board 711 transmits a predetermined signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(MAX BET button LED 721)
The MAX BET button LED 721 is provided inside the MAX BET button 8 and connected to the MAX BET button LED board 701. Here, the MAX BET button LED 721 lights up when it is time to accept the operation of the MAX BET button 8 and turns off when it is not time to accept the operation of the MAX BET button 8. In this way, it is notified that it is the timing to receive the operation of the MAX BET button 8 and the timing that the operation of the MAX BET button 8 is not received.

(Stop button LED 722)
The stop button LED 722 includes (a) a left stop button LED provided inside the left stop button 11, (b) a middle stop button LED provided inside the middle stop button 12, and (c) right stop A right stop button LED provided inside the button 13 is provided. Here, the left stop button LED is provided to notify that it is a timing to receive an operation of the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button LED is a timing to receive an operation of the middle stop button 12. The right stop button LED is provided to notify that it is time to receive an operation of the right stop button 13. Specifically, the left stop button LED, the middle stop button LED, and the right stop button LED are lighted when it is time to receive an operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and the left stop If it is time not to accept the operation of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, or the right stop button 13, the light is turned off. As a result, (a) it is time to receive the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and (b) the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Informing that it is the timing which it does not receive is done.

(Production button LED 723)
The effect button LED 723 is provided to notify that it is time to receive an operation of the effect button 21. Specifically, the effect button LED 723 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21, and is turned off when it is not time to accept the operation of the effect button 21. As a result, notification of (a) timing to receive the operation of the effect button 21 and (b) timing to not receive the operation of the effect button 21 are performed.

(Lumbar panel LED 724)
The waist panel LED 724 is provided to make it easy for the player to recognize the model name, the motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Here, the waist panel LED 724 lights up when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player can easily recognize the model name, the motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. It should be noted that the lumbar panel LED 724 may be turned off based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Rendering device control board 800)
The rendering device control board 800 is provided to control an upper left rendering device 811 described later, a lower left rendering device 812 described below, an upper right rendering device 813 described below, and a lower right rendering device 814 described below. Further, the rendering device control board 800 is connected to a rendering device drive relay substrate 750, an upper left rendering device substrate 801, a lower left rendering device substrate 802, an upper right rendering device substrate 803, and a lower right rendering device substrate 804.

(Upper left rendering device substrate 801)
An upper left rendering device substrate 801 is connected to an upper left rendering device 811 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper left rendering device 811 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper left rendering device 811 described later via a rendering control substrate 600, a rendering device drive substrate 650, a rendering device drive relay substrate 750, a rendering device control substrate 800, and an upper left rendering device substrate 801. Process to emit light from the LED. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player is performed.

(Lower left rendering device substrate 802)
The lower left rendering device substrate 802 is connected to a lower left rendering device 812 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower left rendering device 812 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the lower left rendering device 812 described later via the effect control substrate 600, the rendering device drive substrate 650, the rendering device drive relay substrate 750, the rendering device control substrate 800, and the lower left rendering device substrate 802. Process to emit light from the LED. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player is performed.

(Upper right rendering device substrate 803)
The upper right rendering device substrate 803 is connected to an upper right rendering device 813 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper right rendering device 813 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the upper right rendering device 813 described later via the rendering control substrate 600, the rendering device drive substrate 650, the rendering device drive relay substrate 750, the rendering device control substrate 800, and the upper right rendering device substrate 803. Process to emit light from the LED. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player is performed.

(Lower right rendering device substrate 804)
The lower right rendering device substrate 804 is connected to a lower right rendering device 814 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower right rendering device 814 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is connected to the lower right rendering device 814 described later via the rendering control substrate 600, the rendering device drive substrate 650, the rendering device drive relay substrate 750, the rendering device control substrate 800, and the lower right rendering device substrate 804. A process is performed to make the provided LED emit light. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player is performed.

(Top left rendering device 811)
The upper left rendering device 811 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50, and is connected to the upper left rendering device substrate 801. The upper left rendering device 811 incorporates an LED, and the LED incorporated in the upper left rendering device 811 emits light based on satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

(Lower left rendering device 812)
The lower left rendering device 812 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower left rendering device substrate 802. The lower left rendering device 812 incorporates an LED, and the LED incorporated in the lower left rendering device 812 emits light based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

(Upper right production device 813)
The upper right rendering device 813 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50, and is connected to the upper right rendering device substrate 803. Further, the upper right rendering device 813 incorporates an LED, and the LED incorporated in the upper right rendering device 813 emits light based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

(Bottom right effect device 814)
The lower right rendering device 814 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50, and is connected to the lower right rendering device substrate 804. Further, the lower right rendering device 814 incorporates an LED, and the LED incorporated in the lower right rendering device 814 emits light based on satisfaction of the predetermined condition.

(LED control board 850)
The LED control board 850 is provided to control the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, the side LED 863, the saucer side LED 864, and the saucer LED 865. Further, the LED control substrate 850 is connected to the top LED substrate 851, the corner LED substrate 852, the side LED substrate 853, the receiver side LED substrate 854, and the receiver LED substrate 855.

(A movable mode of the rendering device 50)
Next, the movable aspect of the rendering device 50 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the rendering device 50 includes a base 51, a handle 52, and a sheath 53.

(Base 51)
The base portion 51 is a member serving as a base of the rendering device 50, and incorporates the LED in a portion covered by the handle portion 52 and the sheath portion 53. Here, when executing the predetermined effect, the sub control substrate 400 performs a process of causing the LEDs contained in the base unit 51 to emit light via the effect control substrate 600 and the effect device drive substrate 650. Further, on the back side of the base unit 51, an upper left rendering device 811, a lower left rendering device 812, an upper right rendering device 813, and a lower right rendering device 814 are provided.

(Stem 52)
The handle 52 is attached to the left of the base 51 in a front view. The handle 52 has a shape that imitates the handle of a Japanese sword. Further, the handle 52 is movable in the left and right direction.

(Seal 53)
The sheath 53 is attached to the right side of the base 51 in a front view. Moreover, the sheath part 53 is carrying out the shape which imitated the sheath of a Japanese sword. Moreover, the sheath part 53 is movable to the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the sub control board 400 drives the rendering device 50 by driving the left rendering device motor 651 and the right rendering device motor 654 via the rendering control substrate 600 and the rendering device drive substrate 650. Perform processing to move upward. When it is detected by the upper left rendering device sensor 652s and the upper right rendering device sensor 655s that the rendering device 50 has moved to a predetermined position, the left rendering device motor 651 and the right rendering device motor 654 The upward movement is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, after the rendering device 50 is moved to a predetermined position, the sub control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the left direction in a front view through the rendering control substrate 600 and the rendering device drive substrate 650. The movable processing and the processing for moving the sheath 53 in the right direction in a front view are performed, and the upper left rendering device 811 and the lower left rendering device 812 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800. , The upper right rendering device 813 and the lower right rendering device 814 are moved. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting the LED built in the base part which is not covered by the movement of the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. The LED built in the upper left rendering device 811, the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812, and the upper right rendering device 813 through the rendering control substrate 600, the rendering device drive substrate 650, and the rendering device control substrate 800 A process of emitting light from the LED being held and the LED built into the lower right rendering device 814 is performed.

  In addition, after the effect by the effect device 50 as shown in FIG. 5C is performed, the sub control board 400 is controlled by the left effect device motor 651 and the right via the effect control substrate 600 and the effect device drive substrate 650. By driving the effect device motor 654, a process of moving the effect device 50 downward is performed. Then, when it is detected by the lower left rendering device sensor 653s and the lower right rendering device sensor 656s that the rendering device 50 is moved to the original position before moving, the left rendering device motor 651 and the right rendering device motor 654 The downward movement of the rendering device 50 according to is stopped. Further, when moving the rendering device 50 downward, the sub control substrate 400 moves the handle 52 in the right direction in a front view through the effect control substrate 600 and the rendering device drive substrate 650, and the sheath portion 53 is movable in the left direction of the front view, and through the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the upper left effect device 811, the lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, the right The lower effect device 814 is returned to its original position. Further, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning off the LED built in the base part covered by the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and the effect control board 600. The LED built in the upper left rendering device 811, the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 via the rendering device drive substrate 650 and the rendering device control substrate 800 And the process of turning off the LED built in the lower right rendering device 814. As a result, the rendering device 50 returns to the original position.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described based on FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect a reel index, the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 Is defined as "00". Further, symbol positions "00" to "20" are defined with reference to symbol position "00".

(Symbol combination table of symbol combination group “00”)
Next, based on FIG. 7, the symbol combination table of "00" will be described.

  The symbol combination table of the symbol combination group "00" is stored in the main ROM 302, and the symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, and the symbol combination And prescribes the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  In addition, "preparative replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP01" in bit "00000001" of the symbol combination table of the symbol combination group "00", and the symbol bit name "REP02" is defined in bit "00000010". "First Bonus Replay" is defined as "," "Second Bonus Replay" is defined as bit "0000003" as the symbol bit name "REP03", and bit "00001000" is designated as the symbol bit name "REP04". "3rd Bonus Replay" is defined as "," "ART Replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP05" in the bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "REP06" in the bit "00100000". As "Special Lip B) “01000000”, “RUSH Replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP07” in bit “01000000”, “middle replay” as the symbol bit name “REP08” in bit “10000000” Is defined.

  Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates replay, and plays the gaming state. Control to grant benefits such as transition. For example, when a combination of symbols of "replay A", "replay A" and "BAR" is displayed on the effective line, the main CPU 301 displays a combination of symbols relating to "prepare replay". It determines with having been performed and performs control which transfers to the below-mentioned 2nd RT gaming state with the action | operation of replay. In addition, when the combination of the symbols displayed along the effective line does not match the combination of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is "lost".

(Symbol combination table of symbol combination group “01”)
Next, based on FIG. 8, the symbol combination table of "01" will be described.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01” is stored in the main ROM 302 in the same manner as the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00”, and the symbol combination name and the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name The symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the combination of symbols, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are specified.

  In addition, “up-right-up replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP09” in the bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”, and the symbol bit name “bit” “00000010” "BAR replay" is defined as REP10 ", and" upper watermelon replay "is defined as symbol bit name" REP11 "in bit" 00000100 ", and symbol bit name" REP12 "in bit" 00001000 ". "Lower watermelon replay" is defined as "", and "upper row cherry replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP13" in bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "REP14" is defined in bit "00100000". As "" lower cherries “Ray” is defined, and “bit 1 replay” is defined as bit “01000000” as symbol bit name “REP 15”, and bit “10000000” is designated as symbol bit name “REP 16”. A second chance eye replay is defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “prepare replay”, “first bonus replay”, “second bonus replay”, “third bonus replay”, “art replay”, “special replay”, “RUSH replay”, and “middle replay” "," Curly Replay "," BAR Replay "," Upper Watermelon Replay "," Lower Watermelon Replay "," Upper Cherry Replay "," Lower Cherry Replay "," First Chance Eye Replay "," Second Chance Eye " When a combination of symbols relating to “replay” is displayed on the activated line, the replay is activated. Here, when the operation of replay is performed, it is possible to play a game without inserting a medal.

(Symbol combination table of symbol combination group “02”)
Next, based on FIG. 9, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02” will be described.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group of "02" is stored in the main ROM 302 like the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group of "00" and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group of "01". The combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the combination of symbols, and the number of medals paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, "first push order bell" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML01" in bit "00000001" of the symbol combination table of symbol combination group "02", and symbol bit in "00000010" The "second push order bell" is defined as the name "NML02", and the "third push order bell" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML03" in the bit "00000100", and the bit "00001000" is specified. The "fourth pushing order bell" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML04", and the "fifth pushing order bell" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML05" in the bit "00010000". "Sixth push order bell" is specified in "00100000" as the symbol bit name "NML06". The "7th push order bell" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML 07" in the bit "01000000", and the "8th push order bell" as the symbol bit name "NML 08" is defined in the bit "10000000". It is prescribed.

(Symbol combination table of symbol combination group “03”)
Next, based on FIG. 10, the symbol combination table of the symbol combination group “03” will be described.

  A symbol combination table with a symbol combination group of "03" is a symbol combination table with a symbol combination group of "00", a symbol combination table with a symbol combination group of "01", and a symbol combination table with a symbol combination group of "02" Similarly, stored in the main ROM 302, the symbol combination name, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, a symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, a combination of symbols and a medal to be paid out to the player It defines the number of payouts.

  In addition, “9th push order bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML09” in bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table with symbol combination group “03”, and the symbol bit in “00000010” "The tenth pushing order bell" is defined as the name "NML10", and "eleventh pushing order bell" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML11" in the bit "00000100", and it is in the bit "00001000" “12th pushing order bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML12”, “correct bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML13” in the bit “00010000”, and the bit “00100000” In the above, “right upward watermelon” is specified as the symbol bit name “NML14”. In the bit "01000000", "water falling to the right" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML15", and in the bit "10000000", the "first chance" is defined as the symbol bit name "NML16" There is.

(Symbol combination table of symbol combination group “04”)
Next, based on FIG. 11, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “04” will be described.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “04” is the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00”, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”, and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02”. The symbol combination group is stored in the main ROM 302 like the symbol combination table of "03", and the symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, and the symbol The combination and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, a “second chance” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML17” in bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table of the symbol combination group “04”, and the symbol bit name in bit “00000010”. "1st cherries" is defined as "NML18", "2nd cherries" is defined as a symbol bit name "NML19" in bit "00000100", and a symbol bit name is defined in bits "00001000" "Middle cherry" is defined as "NML20", "first blank" is defined as the symbol bit name "BLK01" in bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "in 00100000". "Second blank" is specified as "BLK02" To 01000000 ", as the symbol bit name" BLK03 "" third blank "are defined, the bit" 10000000 "is" fourth blank "is defined as the symbol bit name" BLK04 ".

  Here, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols relating to the “first pushing order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to the “second pushing order bell”, a combination of the designs relating to the “third pushing order bell”, “first Combination of symbols pertaining to 4 push order bells, combination of symbols pertaining to "5 th push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to "6 th push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to "7 th push order bell", The combination of symbols related to the "eighth pushing order bell", the combination of the symbols related to the "ninth pushing order bell", the combination of the symbols related to the "tenth pushing order bell", the design of the "eleventh pushing order bell" Combination, combination of symbols related to "12th Pushing order bell", combination of symbols related to "correct answer bell", combination of symbols related to "upper right watermelon", combination of symbols related to "lower right watermelon", "first A combination of symbols related to "Jansu", a combination of symbols related to "second chance", a combination of symbols related to "first cherry", a combination of symbols related to "second cherry", a symbol related to "middle row cherry" When the combination of is displayed on the activated line, medals are paid out.

  In addition, combination of symbols concerning "the first push order bell", combination of symbols concerning "the second push order bell", combination of symbols concerning "the third push order bell", "the fourth push order bell" A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols pertaining to "the fifth push order bell", a combination of symbols pertaining to "the sixth push order bell", a combination of symbols pertaining to "the seventh push order bell", "the eighth push order bell" Combination of symbols pertaining to "the ninth push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to the "10th push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to the "11th push order bell", "12th push order" The combination of the symbols related to the bell, the combination of the symbols related to the correct answer bell, the combination of the symbols related to the right rising watermelon, the combination of the symbols related to the right falling watermelon, the symbols related to the first chance eyes Combination, combination of symbols related to "second chance", combination of symbols related to "first cherry", combination of symbols related to "second cherry", combination of symbols related to "middle row cherry" , The combination of symbols pertaining to "winning".

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to the "first push order bell", the combination of the symbols related to the "second push order bell", the combination of the symbols related to the "third push order bell", the "fourth push order bell" A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols pertaining to "the fifth push order bell", a combination of symbols pertaining to "the sixth push order bell", a combination of symbols pertaining to "the seventh push order bell", "the eighth push order bell" Combination of symbols pertaining to "the ninth push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to the "10th push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to the "11th push order bell", "12th push order" The combination of symbols related to "bell" is generically called the combination of symbols related to "push order bell".

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to the "first push order bell", the combination of the symbols related to the "second push order bell", the combination of the symbols related to the "third push order bell", the "fourth push order bell" A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols pertaining to "the fifth push order bell", a combination of symbols pertaining to "the sixth push order bell", a combination of symbols pertaining to "the seventh push order bell", "the eighth push order bell" Combination of symbols pertaining to "the ninth push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to the "10th push order bell", combination of symbols pertaining to the "11th push order bell", "12th push order" The combination of symbols pertaining to the bell and the combination of symbols pertaining to the correct answer bell are collectively referred to as the combination of symbols pertaining to the bell.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “upper right watermelon” and a combination of symbols relating to “lower right watermelon” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “watermelon”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to the “first chance eye” and a combination of symbols relating to the “second chance eye” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to the “chance eye”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first cherry”, a combination of symbols relating to “second cherry”, and a combination of symbols relating to “middle cherry” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “cherry”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to the “first blank”, a combination of symbols relating to the “second blank”, a combination of symbols relating to the “third blank”, and a combination of symbols relating to the “fourth blank” It is called a combination of symbols related to "blank".

  On the other hand, a combination of symbols relating to “prepare replay”, a combination of symbols relating to “first bonus replay”, a combination of symbols pertaining to “second bonus replay”, a combination of symbols pertaining to “third bonus replay”, “ART replay” A combination of symbols involved, a combination of symbols pertaining to "special replay", a combination of symbols pertaining to "RUSH replay", a combination of symbols pertaining to "middle replay", a combination of symbols pertaining to "upper right replay", "BAR replay" The combination of the symbols pertaining to the “upper row watermelon replay”, the combination of the symbols pertaining to the “lower row watermelon replay”, the combination of the symbols pertaining to the “upper row cherry replay”, the combination of the symbols pertaining to the “lower row cherry replay” Involved in "first chance eye replay" Combination of symbols, are collectively the combination of symbols relating to the "second chance eyes Replay", that the combination of symbols relating to the "Replay".

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “the first bonus replay”, a combination of symbols pertaining to the “second bonus replay”, and a combination of symbols pertaining to the “third bonus replay” are collectively called a combination of symbols pertaining to the “bonus replay”.

  In addition, the combination of symbols related to "middle replay" and the combination of symbols related to "upper right replay" are collectively referred to as the combination of symbols related to "normal replay".

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “upper watermelon replay” and a combination of symbols relating to “lower watermelon replay” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “watermelon replay”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to "upper row cherry replay" and a combination of symbols related to "lower row cherry replay" are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to "cherry replay".

  In addition, the combination of the symbols related to the "first chance eye replay" and the combination of the symbols pertaining to the "second chance eye replay" are collectively called the combination of the symbols pertaining to the "chance eye replay".

(Relationship between winning combination, operation sequence of stop button, winning etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 12, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and the winning will be described.

  In FIG. 12, the winning number corresponding to the winning combination, the contents of the winning number, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not the winning combination can be determined in each gaming state, and the stop operation order It shows the relationship with the combination of symbols that can be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the condition device to be activated differs depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when the winning combination of the winning number "13" is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices to be activated are "REP 08" and "REP 09". That is, when the winning combination of the winning number "13" is determined, one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to "middle replay" or the symbol combinations related to "right upward replay" is on the effective line Will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 Depending on the order, winning combinations are provided in which combinations of symbols aligned on the activated line are different. For example, when "Bonus Replay BR1" of the winning number "17" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices to be activated are "REP 08", "REP 09", and "REP 10". , "REP 12", and "REP 15". In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated first, any of the combinations of symbols related to "middle replay," "upper right replay," "BAR replay," or "lower watermelon replay". The combination of symbols will be displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, a combination of symbols relating to “middle replay” is displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the right stop button 13 is operated first, any combination of symbols among the combinations of symbols related to “middle replay” or “BAR replay” will be displayed on the effective line. .

  However, in this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated first, among combinations of symbols relating to “BAR Replay”, combinations of symbols allowed to be displayed on the effective line, and on the effective line There is a combination of symbols that is not permitted to be displayed. Similarly, even when the right stop button 13 is operated first, among the combinations of symbols related to "BAR Replay", the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the effective line and the display on the effective line are displayed. There is a combination of symbols that can not be tolerated.

  On the other hand, there is provided a winning combination in which combinations of symbols arranged on the effective line are not different regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when the "common bell" of the winning number "31" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices to be activated are "NML01", "NML02", "NML03", " NML04 "," NML05 "," NML06 "," NML07 "," NML08 "," NML09 "," NML10 "," NML11 "," NML12 ", and" NML13 ". In this case, if the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, and the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “first press” Of the combinations of symbols relating to "order bell", "second push order bell", "third push order bell", "fourth push order bell", or "correct bell", any symbol combination is effective line It will be displayed on the top.

  In addition, regardless of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed at appropriate timing. If not done, a combination of symbols related to "winning" may not be displayed on the effective line. For example, when “watermelon” of the winning number “25” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices to be activated are “NML14” and “NML15”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, and in any case when the right stop button 13 is operated first, Among the combination of symbols according to “or the combination of symbols according to“ lower right watermelon ”, any combination of symbols may be displayed on the effective line, but the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 at appropriate timing. If the right stop button 13 is not operated, one of the symbol combinations of the symbol combination relating to the “right upward watermelon” or the combination of the symbols relating to the “right downward watermelon” is displayed on the effective line. There is nothing to do.

(First winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state)
Next, the non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the non-RT gaming state.

  In the non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 13, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  Further, in the non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, the lottery value is defined only for the “normal replay” of the winning number “13”.

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state, “ready state transition replay JR 1” of the winning number “01”, "Ready transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 4" of the winning number "04", "Direct hit of the winning number" 05 " "Bonus", "Bonus rush replay BI1" of winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of winning number "07", "Bonus rush replay BI3" of winning number "08", "ART" of winning number "09" Medium Replay AR 1, Winning Number "10" "Replaying in AR ART 2", Winning Number "11", "Replaying in ART AR 3", Winning Number "12" RT Replay AR 4 ", RUSH Replay R1" for winning number "14", "RUSH Replay R2" for winning number "15", "State transition Replay" for winning number "16", "Bonus for winning number" 17 " Medium Replay BR1, "Bonus Replay BR2" for winning number "18", "Bonus during Replay BR3" for winning number "19", "Watermelon Replay" for winning number "20", "Weakness for winning number" 21 " “Cherry Replay”, “strong Cherry Replay” of the winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23” are not determined as winning combinations.

(First winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state.

  In the first RT winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 14, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state is “ready state transition replay JR 1” of the win number “01”, “ready state transition replay JR 2” of the win number “02”, “3 of the win number“ 03 ” A lottery value is defined in the preparation state transition replay JR 3 ", the" preparation state transition replay JR 4 "of the winning number" 04 ", and the" direct hit Bonus "of the winning number" 05 ".

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and in the case where the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Bonus rush replay BI1” of the winning number “06” is won Number "07" "Bonus rush Replay BI2", winning number "08" "Bonus rush Replay BI3", winning number "09" "ART Replay AR1", winning number "10" "ART Replay AR2" , "Art Replay AR3" for the winning number "11", "Replay AR4" for the winning number "12", "Normal Replay" for the winning number "13", "RUSH Replay R1" for the winning number "14", "RUSH Replay R2" of the winning number "15", "State transition Replay" of the winning number "16", "Bonus Replay BR1 of the winning number" 17 " , "Bonus Replay BR2" of winning number "18", "Bonus during Replay BR3" of winning number "19", "watermelon replay" of winning number "20", "weak cherry replay" of winning number "21", The "strong cherry replay" of the winning number "22" and the "chance eye replay CR1" of the winning number "23" are never determined as the winning combination.

(The first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state)
Next, based on FIG. 15, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described.

  The first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the second RT gaming state.

  In the second RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state has a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 15, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, "Bonus rush replay BI1" of the winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of the winning number "07", "Bonus rush of the winning number" 08 " A lottery value is defined in Replay BI3.

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “ready state transition replay JR 1” of the winning number “01”, "Ready transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 4" of the winning number "04", "Direct hit of the winning number" 05 " "Bonus", "Replay AR 1 in ART" of winning number "09", "Replay AR 2 in ART" of winning number "10", "Replay AR 3 in ART" of winning number "11", and "ART of winning number 12" Medium Replay AR 4, "Normal Replay" for winning number "13", "RUSH Replay R1" for winning number "14", "RUSH Replay R2" for winning number "15", won Issue "16" of "State Transition Replay", winning number "17" of "Bonus Replay BR1", winning number "18" of "Bonus Replay BR2", winning number "19" of "Bonus Replay BR3", Winning number “20” “watermelon replay”, winning number “21” “weak cherry replay”, winning number “22” “strong cherry replay”, winning number “23” “chance eye replay CR1” are winning roles It will not be determined as

(1st winning combination determination table for 3rd RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the third RT gaming state.

  In the third RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 16, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  Also, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state is “Normal Replay” for the winning number “13”, “State transition Replay” for the winning number “16”, “Bonson Replay BR 1” for the winning number “17”. , "Bonus Replay BR2" of winning number "18", "Bonus during Replay BR3" of winning number "19", "watermelon replay" of winning number "20", "weak cherry replay" of winning number "21", A lottery value is defined in the "strong cherry replay" of the winning number "22" and the "chance eye replay CR1" of the winning number "23".

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state, “ready state transition replay JR 1” of the winning number “01”, "Ready transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 4" of the winning number "04", "Direct hit of the winning number" 05 " "Bonus", "Bonus rush replay BI1" of winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of winning number "07", "Bonus rush replay BI3" of winning number "08", "ART" of winning number "09" Medium Replay AR1 ",“ Replaying AR2 in ART ”of winning number“ 10 ”,“ Replaying AR3 in ART ”of winning number“ 11 ”, and“ 12 ”of winning number ART during the replay AR4 "," RUSH replay R1 "winning numbers" 14 "," RUSH replay R2 of the winning number "15" ", will not be determined as a winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for the 4th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fourth RT gaming state.

  In the fourth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state has a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 17, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  Also, the first winning combination determination table for the 4th RT gaming state is “Replay in AR ART” of winning number “09”, “Replay in AR ART” of winning number “10”, and “in ART of win number“ 11 ”. "Replay AR3", "Replay in ART" for winning number "12", "normal replay" for winning number "13", "watermelon replay" for winning number "20", "weak cherry replay" for winning number "21" A lottery value is defined in “strong cherry replay” of the winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” of the winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state, “ready status transition replay JR 1” of the winning number “01”, "Ready transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 4" of the winning number "04", "Direct hit of the winning number" 05 " "Bonus", "Bonus rush replay BI1" of winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of winning number "07", "Bonus rush replay BI3" of winning number "08", "RUSH" of winning number "14" "Replay R1", "RUSH Replay R2" with winning number "15", "State transition Replay" with winning number "16", "Bonu" with winning number "17" Medium replay BR1 "," Bonus in the Replay BR2 of the winning number "18" ", will not be determined as the" Bonus in the Replay BR3 "is the winning combination of winning numbers" 19 ".

(First winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state has a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 18, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  Further, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state is “RUSH replay R1” of the winning number “14”, “RUSH replay R2” of the winning number “15”, and “watermelon replay” of the winning number “20”. A lottery value is defined in the “weak cherry replay” of the win number “21”, the “strong cherry replay” of the win number “22”, and the “chance eye replay CR1” of the win number “23”.

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “ready status transition replay JR 1” of the winning number “01”, "Ready transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 4" of the winning number "04", "Direct hit of the winning number" 05 " "Bonus", "Bonus rush replay BI1" of winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of winning number "07", "Bonus rush replay BI3" of winning number "08", "ART" of winning number "09" Medium Replay AR1 ",“ Replaying AR2 in ART ”of winning number“ 10 ”,“ Replaying AR3 in ART ”of winning number“ 11 ”, and“ 12 ”of winning number ART Replay AR 4 "," Normal Replay "for winning number" 13 "," State transition Replay "for winning number" 16 "," Bonus during Replay BR1 "for winning number" 17 "," Bonus for winning number "18" Medium Replay BR2 "Bonus Medium Replay BR3" of the winning number "19" is not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for the 6th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the sixth RT gaming state.

  In the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. It is defined whether or not. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state has a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a setting value. The lottery value for “3”, the lottery value for the setting value “4”, the lottery value for the setting value “5”, and the lottery value for the setting value “6” are respectively defined. It is done. In FIG. 19, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  Also, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state is “replay in AR ART” of winning number “09”, “replay in AR ART” of winning number “10”, and “in ART of win number“ 11 ”. A lottery value is defined in “Replay AR3” and “Replay in AR ART 4” of the winning number “12”.

  That is, the lottery values other than these are “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “ready status transition replay JR 1” of the winning number “01”, "Ready transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", "Ready transition transition Replay JR 4" of the winning number "04", "Direct hit of the winning number" 05 " "Bonus", "Bonus rush replay BI1" of winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of winning number "07", "Bonus rush replay BI3" of winning number "08", "normal" of winning number "13" “Replay”, “RUSH Replay R1” for the winning number “14”, “RUSH Replay R2” for the winning number “15”, “State transition message for the winning number“ 16 ” “Bonus Replay BR1” of winning number “17”, “Bonus Replay BR2” of winning number “18”, “Bonus during Replay BR3” of winning number “19”, “watermelon of winning number“ 20 ” "Replay", "Weak Cherry Replay" with the winning number "21", "Strong Cherry Replay" with the winning number "22", and "Chance Eye Replay CR1" with the winning number "23" will never be determined as the winning combination.

  The first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for second RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for third RT gaming state, The fourth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, the fifth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table, and the sixth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table are collectively referred to as a “first winning combination determination table”.

  In addition, "preparing state transition Replay JR 1" of the winning number "01", "preparing state transition Replay JR 2" of the winning number "02", "preparing state transition Replay JR 3" of the winning number "03", and the winning number " The "Ready State Transition Replay JR 4" of 04 "is collectively called" Ready State Transition Replay ".

  In addition, "Bonus rush replay" is collectively referred to as "Bonus rush replay BI1" of the winning number "06", "Bonus rush replay BI2" of the winning number "07", and "Bonus rush replay BI3" of the winning number "08". "

  In addition, “Replay in AR ART” of winning number “09”, “Replay in AR ART” of winning number “10”, “Replay in AR ART” of winning number “11”, and “12” in win number "ART Replay AR 4" is generically called "ART Replay".

  In addition, "RUSH Replay R1" of winning number "14" and "RUSH Replay R2" of winning number "15" are collectively called "RUSH Replay".

  In addition, "Bonus Replay BR1" with the winning number "17", "Bonus Replay BR2" with the winning number "18", and "Bonus Replay BR3" with the winning number "19" are collectively referred to as "Bonus Replay" "

  Also, the "weak cherry replay" of the winning number "21" and the "strong cherry replay" of the winning number "22" are collectively referred to as "cherry replay".

(2nd winning combination decision table)
Next, the second winning combination determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The second winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and will be described later in non-RT gaming state, first RT gaming state, second RT gaming state, third RT gaming state, fourth RT gaming state, fifth RT gaming state, sixth RT It is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the gaming state.

  Further, in the second winning combination determination table, similarly to the first winning combination determination table, the winning number, the content of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all It is defined whether or not it is a set common value. Here, in the present embodiment, in the second winning combination determination table, the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value is “3”. A lottery value for the setting value of “4”, a lottery value for the setting value of “5”, and a lottery value for the setting value of “6” are respectively defined. In FIG. 20, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the setting value is “5” Illustration of the lottery value in the case is omitted.

  In addition, the second winning combination determination table, the chance number Replay CR2 of the winning number "24", "watermelon" of the winning number "25", "weak cherry" of the winning number "26", the winning number "27" "Strong cherries", "middle cherries" of winning number "28", "chance of CN2" of winning number "29", "chance of CN2" of winning number "30", "common bell" of winning number "31" , "Pressing order bell A1" of winning number "32", "Pressing order bell B1" of winning number "33", "Pressing order bell A2" of winning number "34", "Pressing order bell of winning number" 35 " "B2", "pushing order bell A3" of winning number "36", "pushing order bell B3" of winning number "37", "pushing order bell A4" of win number "38", "pushing order of win number" 39 " The lottery value is defined in the order bell B4.

  Here, to describe the relationship between the first winning combination determination table and the second winning combination determination table, when performing a lottery using the first winning combination determination table, it is determined as the winning combination according to the current gaming state It is prescribed about the winning combination and the winning combination not determined as the winning combination. On the other hand, when the lottery is performed using the second winning combination determination table, the winning combinations which can be determined as the winning combination in all the game states are defined.

  In addition, "chance eye replay CR1" of the winning number "23" and "chance eye replay CR2" of the winning number "24" are collectively referred to as "chance eye replay".

  Also, "weak cherry" of the winning number "26", "strong cherry" of the winning number "27", and "middle cherry" of the winning number "28" are collectively referred to as "cherry".

  In addition, “chance number CN1” of the winning number “29” and “chance number CN2” of the winning number “30” are collectively referred to as “chance number”.

  In addition, “common bell” of the winning number “31”, “pushing bell A1” of the winning number “32”, “pushing bell B1” of the win number “33”, and “pushing of the win number“ 34 ” Forward Bell A2 "Pressed Bell B2" of winning number "35", "Pressing Bell A3" of winning number "36", "Pressed Bell B3" of winning number "37", Winning number The "push order bell A4" of "38" and the "push order bell B4" of the winning number "39" are collectively referred to as "bell".

  In addition, “pushing order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, “pushing order bell B1” of the winning number “33”, “pushing order bell A2” of the win number “34”, and the win number “35” "Pushing order bell B2", "pushing order bell A3" of winning number "36", "pushing order bell B3" of winning number "37", and "pushing order bell A4" of win number "38", The "pushing order bell B4" of the winning number "39" is generically called "pushing order bell".

(Playing state transition diagram)
Next, based on FIG. 21, a game state transition diagram will be described.

  The gaming state transition diagram defines the current gaming state, transition conditions serving as conditions for transitioning the gaming state, and the gaming state of the transition destination.

  Here, from the non-RT gaming state, when the combination of any of the symbols related to "blank" is displayed on the activated line when the current gaming state is the non-RT gaming state It is transferred to the first RT gaming state.

  Also, if the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "prepare replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the first RT gaming state It is transferred to the second RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "Bonus replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the first RT gaming state The state is shifted to the third RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, the second RT gaming state is selected from the second RT gaming state when any one of the symbol combinations among the combinations relating to “blank” is displayed on the activated line. 1 RT transition to gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "Bonus replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the second RT gaming state The state is shifted to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "ART Replay" is displayed on the activated line, the second RT gaming state is displayed. It is transferred to the 4th RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "RUSH replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the second RT gaming state The state is shifted to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, the third RT gaming state is selected from the third RT gaming state when any combination of symbols among the combinations relating to “blank” is displayed on the activated line. 1 RT transition to gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "ART Replay" is displayed on the activated line, the third RT gaming state It is transferred to the 4th RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "RUSH replay" is displayed on the activated line, the third RT gaming state is displayed. The state is shifted to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In the case where the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, the fourth RT gaming state is selected from the fourth RT gaming state when any one of the symbol combinations among the combinations relating to "blank" is displayed on the activated line. 1 RT transition to gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the 4th RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "RUSH Replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the 4th RT gaming state The state is shifted to the fifth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the 4th RT gaming state, when a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "special replay" is displayed on the activated line, the 4th RT gaming state It is transferred to the sixth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, the fifth RT gaming state is selected from the fifth RT gaming state when any symbol combination is displayed among the combinations of symbols relating to "blank" on the activated line. 1 RT transition to gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "Bonus replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the fifth RT gaming state The state is shifted to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbols pertaining to "ART Replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the fifth RT gaming state It is transferred to the 4th RT gaming state.

  In the case where the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, the sixth RT gaming state is selected from the sixth RT gaming state when any symbol combination is displayed among the combinations of the symbols relating to “blank” on the activated line. 1 RT transition to gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, and a combination of any of the symbol combinations relating to "ART Replay" is displayed on the activated line, from the sixth RT gaming state It is transferred to the 4th RT gaming state.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board will be described based on FIG.

  A list of states managed by the sub control board is defined for the state name and the number corresponding to each state name. Here, the status managed by the sub control board in this embodiment is “normal status” with a status number “01”, “chance precursor status” with a status number “02”, and “status” with a status number “03”. "Bonus precursor state", "chance state" with the state number "04", "Bonus preparation state" with the state number "05", "1st Bonus state" with the state number "06", and the state number "07" "2nd Bonus state", "3rd Bonus state" with the state number "08", "1st fall standby state" with the state number "09", "ART ready state" with the state number "10", the state number "ART state" of "11", "first additional precursor state" of state number "12", "first additional preparation state" of state number "13", "first upper add state" of state number "14" "State", state number "15" Fall standby state "," 2nd addition precursor state "with state number" 16 "," 2nd preparation ready state "with state number" 17 "," 2nd addition state "with state number" 18 ", state A "third fall standby state" having a number "19" and a "fourth fall standby state" having a state number "20" are defined.

(Transition diagram of state managed by sub control board)
Next, a transition diagram of the state managed by the sub control board will be described based on FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the sub control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, the description of each state and the transition condition to each state will be described.

(Normal state)
The normal state is disadvantageous to the player. Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, in addition to performing the lottery for transitioning to the Bonus preparation state, the transition lottery to a chance state in which the transition to the Bonus state is easier than in the normal state is performed. I am improving the interest to the game.

  Here, in the normal state, when the transition lottery of the chance state is won, control to shift to the chance sign state is performed. Further, when the transition preparation lottery of the bonus preparation state is won, or when the value of the ceiling game number counter to be described later becomes "0", the control to shift to the bonus precursor state is performed. Furthermore, when “the direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control to shift to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Chance sign)
The chance sign state is a state in which transition from the normal state to the chance state is made. Here, in the chance precursor state, an effect is given that suggests transition to the chance state until the value of the game number counter for the chance precursor state described later becomes "0". Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the chance state.

  Here, in the chance precursor state, when the value of the chance precursor state game number counter described later becomes “0”, control to shift to the chance state is performed. Further, in the chance sign state, when the win lottery for the bonus preparation state is won, or when the value of the ceiling game number counter described later becomes "0", control to shift to the bonus sign state is performed. Furthermore, when “the direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control to shift to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus aura)
The bonus precursor state is a state transitioning from the normal state to the bonus state. Here, in the Bonus precursor state, an effect is given that suggests transition to the Bonus state until the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter becomes “0”. Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus state.

  Here, in the Bonus precursor state, the Bonus preparation is performed when the value of the game number counter for Bonus precursor state described later becomes “0” or when the value of the ceiling game number counter described later becomes “0”. Control to shift to the state is performed. Furthermore, when “the direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control to shift to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Chance status)
The chance state is a state in which the transition to the bonus preparation state is facilitated compared to the normal state. As a result, when the player shifts to the chance state, the player expects to shift to the bonus preparation state.

  Here, in the chance state, when the value of the chance state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes "0", control to shift to the normal state is performed. Further, in the chance state, when the transition lottery of the bonus preparation state is won, or when the value of the ceiling game number counter described later becomes "0", control to shift to the bonus preparation state is performed. Furthermore, when “the direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control to shift to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus preparation state)
The bonus preparation state is a state in which transition is made prior to transition to the first, second, and third bonus states. Here, when a combination of symbols relating to "Bonus Replay" is displayed on the effective line in the "Bonus preparation state", control to shift to any one of the first, second, and third Bonus states is performed. . In addition, when “the direct hit Bonus” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, control to shift to the third Bonus state is performed.

  Here, in the Bonus preparation state, "preparing state transition Replay JR1", "Preparation state transition Replay JR2", "Preparation state transition Replay JR3", or "Preparation state transition Replay JR4" as an elected role by an internal lottery process described later. When is determined, the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46 notifies information for displaying the combination of symbols relating to "prepare replay" on the effective line.

  In the bonus preparation state, if "Bonus rush replay BI1", "Bonus rush replay BI2", or "Bonus rush replay BI3" is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, then the bonus wait described later is performed. Based on the values stored in the information storage area, a combination of symbols related to "the first bonus replay", a combination of symbols pertaining to the "second bonus replay", a combination of the symbols pertaining to the "third bonus replay" on the effective line Information to be displayed is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(1st Bonus state)
The first Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the first Bonus state, a lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the ART preparation state. As a result, since the player plays a game while expecting to shift to the ART preparation state, the interest to the game in the first Bonus state is improved.

  Here, if it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state in the first Bonus state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state. If it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state in the first bonus state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the first bonus state.

(2nd Bonus state)
The second Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the second Bonus state, a lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the ART preparation state as in the first Bonus state. Further, in the present embodiment, the drawing of whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state shifts to the ART preparation state in comparison with the drawing of whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first Bonus state. The probability of being determined is high. As a result, since the player plays a game while expecting to shift to the ART preparation state, the interest to the game in the second Bonus state is improved.

  Here, if it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state. When it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state in the second bonus state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the second bonus state.

(3rd Bonus state)
The third Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, unlike the first bonus state and the second bonus state, the third bonus state is always controlled to shift to the ART preparation state after the third bonus ends. As a result, since the player plays a game while expecting to shift to the third bonus state, interest in the game is improved.

(First fall standby state)
The first fall standby state is a state in which transition to the ART preparation state is not determined in the first bonus state or the second bonus state. In the first fall standby state, a lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the ART preparation state. Here, in the first fall standby state, control to shift to the normal state is performed based on the combination of the symbols relating to the "blank" being displayed on the effective line. In addition, in the first fall fall standby state, as a result of performing a lottery to determine whether to shift to the ART preparation state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed. It will be.

  Here, in the first fall standby state, "pushing order bell A1", "pushing order bell A2", "pushing order bell A3", "pushing order bell A4", "pushing order bell A4" as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later When order bell B1, push order bell B2, push order bell B3, or push order bell B4 is determined, the symbol combination related to the bell is displayed on the effective line Information is not broadcast. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to “normal replay” on an effective line is notified. Therefore, the winning combination "push order bell A1", "push order bell A2", "push order bell A3", "push order bell A4", "push order bell B1", "push order bell B2", "push order" "Bell B3" or "pushing order bell B4" is determined, and if the combination of symbols related to "bell" can not be displayed on the effective line, the combination of symbols related to "blank" is effective line It will be displayed on top and it will shift to the normal state.

(Art preparation state)
The ART preparation state is determined to transition to the ART preparation state in the first or second Bonus state, and then the first or second Bonus state ends, or the third Bonus state ends. It is in the state of transition. Here, in the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART state is performed based on the combination of the symbols relating to "ART Replay" being displayed on the effective line.

  Here, in the ART preparation state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to “ART replay” on the effective line. Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(ART state)
The ART state is an advantageous state for the player. Specifically, in the ART state, when "push order bell" is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to "bell" on the effective line Control to notify by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed.

  Here, in the ART state, when it is determined to shift to the first additional state, control to shift to the first additional precursor state is performed, and it is determined to shift to the second additional state. Is controlled to shift to the second additional precursor state. In addition, when the value of the ART state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes "0", control is performed to shift to the fourth fall standby state.

(First additional warning sign)
The first additional precursor state is a state in which transition is made before transitioning from the ART state to the first additional preparation state. Here, in the first additional precursor state, an effect is performed that suggests transition to the first additional state until the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter described later becomes "0". Thus, the player can be expected to shift to the first additional state. Here, when the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter described later becomes "0" in the first additional precursor state, control to shift to the first additional preparation state is performed.

(First additional preparation condition)
The first additional preparation state is a state in which transition is made before the first additional precursor state is shifted to the first additional state. Here, in the first additional preparation state, control to shift to the first additional state is performed based on the combination of symbols relating to "RUSH Replay" being displayed on the effective line.

  Here, in the first additional preparation state, when “Replay in AR ART” or “Replay in AR ART” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the symbol pertaining to “RUSH Replay” Information for displaying the combination on the effective line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First additional condition)
The first additional state is a state advantageous to the player, in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the first additional state, based on the value of the first additional state game number counter to be described later becoming "0", control to shift to the second fall standby state is performed.

(2nd fall standby state)
The second falling standby state is a state before transitioning to the ART state after the first additional state ends. In addition, in the second falling standby state, control to shift to the ART state is performed based on the combination of the symbols relating to “ART Replay” being displayed on the effective line.

  Here, in the second fall standby state, when “RUSH Replay R1” or “RUSH Replay R2” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, a combination of symbols relating to “ART Replay” is displayed. Information to be displayed on the effective line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(2nd addition warning sign)
The second additional precursor state is a state in which transition is made before transitioning from the ART state to the second additional preparation state. Here, in the second additional precursor state, an effect is performed that suggests transition to the second additional state until the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter described later becomes "0". As a result, the player can be expected to shift to the second additional state. Here, in the second additional precursor state, when the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter described later becomes “0”, control to shift to the second additional preparation state is performed.

(2nd addition preparation state)
The second addition preparation state is a state in which transition is made before the second addition precursor state is shifted to the second addition state. Here, in the second addition preparation state, control to shift to the second addition state is performed based on the combination of the symbols relating to the "special replay" being displayed on the effective line.

  Here, in the second additional preparation state, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, a combination of symbols relating to “special replay” is displayed on the effective line. Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(2nd additional condition)
The second addition state is a state advantageous to the player, in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the second addition state, control to shift to the third fall standby state is performed based on the value of the second addition state game number counter described later becoming "0".

(3rd fall standby state)
The third fall standby state is a state before transitioning to the ART state after the second additional state ends. In addition, in the second falling standby state, control to shift to the ART state is performed based on the combination of the symbols relating to “ART Replay” being displayed on the effective line.

  Here, in the third fall standby state, “ART Replay AR1”, “ART Replay AR2” or “ART Replay AR3” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “ART Replay AR3”. Information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to “Replay” on the effective line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(The fourth fall standby state)
The fourth fall standby state is a state in which transition is made after the ART state ends. In the fourth fall standby state, a lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the ART state. Here, in the fourth fall standby state, control to shift to the normal state is performed based on the combination of the symbols relating to the "blank" being displayed on the effective line. In addition, in the fourth fall standby state, when it is determined to shift to the ART state as a result of performing a lottery whether to shift to the ART state, control to shift to the ART state is performed.

  Here, in the fourth fall standby state, “pushing order bell A1”, “pushing order bell A2”, “pushing order bell A3”, “pushing order bell A4”, “pushing order bell A4” as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later When order bell B1, push order bell B2, push order bell B3, or push order bell B4 is determined, the symbol combination related to the bell is displayed on the effective line Information is not broadcast. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to “normal replay” on an effective line is notified. Therefore, the winning combination "push order bell A1", "push order bell A2", "push order bell A3", "push order bell A4", "push order bell B1", "push order bell B2", "push order" "Bell B3" or "pushing order bell B4" is determined, and if the combination of symbols related to "bell" can not be displayed on the effective line, the combination of symbols related to "blank" is effective line It will be displayed on top and it will shift to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, although the ART state and the like are managed by the sub control board 400, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 300 may manage the ART state and the like.

(Determination decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to determine effects to be performed in each state managed by the sub control board 400. Specifically, effect contents corresponding to "effect No." and "effect No." are defined. Further, in the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub control board 400 are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes (a) a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 24A) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state; b) A chance precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 24B) used when the state managed by the sub control substrate 400 is a chance precursor state (c) The condition managed by the sub control substrate 400 is The decision determination table for bonus precursor condition (see FIG. 24C) used in the bonus precursor condition and (d) the chance condition specification determination used when the condition managed by the sub control board 400 is a chance condition The table (see FIG. 24D) and (e) Bo used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state. The presentation determination table for us preparation state (see FIG. 24E) and the presentation determination table for the first Bonus state used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first bonus state (FIG. 24 (F) ), (G) A second bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second bonus state, (h) managed by the sub control board 400 State is the third bonus state, the third bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used in the third bonus state, and (i) the first state used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first fall standby state When the state managed by the fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (j) the sub control board 400 is the ART preparation state (L) ART preparation state effect determination table (not shown), (k) ART state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state, (l ) The first additional precursor condition effect determination table (not shown) used when the condition controlled by the sub control substrate 400 is the first additional precursor condition, and (m) the condition managed by the sub control substrate 400 A first additional preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used in the first additional preparation state, and (n) a first state used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first additional state Performance for the second fall standby state used when the state managed by the additional state effect determination table (not shown) and (o) the sub control board 400 is the second fall standby state (P) a second additional precursor state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second upper precursor state (not shown); q) A state for managing the second addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state controlled by the sub control substrate 400 is the second addition preparation state, and (r) a state managed by the sub control substrate 400 The second additional state effect determination table (not shown) used when the second additional state is used, and (s) the third state used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third fall standby state Effect determination table for fall standby state (not shown) and (t) Effect determination table for fourth fall standby state used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state (Not shown) is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The bonus preparation state transition lottery table includes (a) a bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (refer to FIG. 25A) for lottery whether to shift to the bonus state in the normal state (see FIG. 25A), b) A bonus preparation status transition lottery table (chance precursor status) (see FIG. 25B) for lottery whether or not to shift to a bonus preparation status in the chance precursor status (c) a bonus status in the bonus status A Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 25C) is provided for lottery whether to shift to the preparation state.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state))
The bonus preparation status transition lottery table (normal status) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for lottery whether or not to shift to the bonus status in the normal status. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state with the probability of “3276/65536”.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance sign)
The bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for lottery whether to shift to the bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state with the probability of “3276/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus preparation status transition lottery table (normal status) and the Bonus preparation status transition lottery table (chance precursor status) have the same value as the lottery value defined according to each winning combination. Although it is prescribed, it is not limited to this, and it is prescribed in the lottery value prescribed in the Bonus preparation status transition lottery table (normal status) and the Bonus preparation status transition lottery table (chance precursor status) The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state))
The bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for lottery whether or not to shift to the bonus preparation state in the chance state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state with a probability of “6554/65536”.

  Here, when the predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state and when the predetermined winning combination is determined in the normal state, one in the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state However, the probability of transitioning to the Bonus ready state is highly specified. Also, in the chance state, even if the "push order bell" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the bonus preparation state, while the normal state and the chance In the precursor state, if the "push order bell" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the lottery of whether to shift to the bonus preparation state is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the chance state has a high probability of transitioning to the Bonus preparation state as compared with the normal state and the chance sign state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table)
Next, the Bonus state distribution lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  In the bonus state allocation lottery table, (a) in the normal state, the bonus state allocation lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) to be referred to when transition to the bonus preparation state is determined. (B) The bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (refer to FIG. 26B) and (c) Chance, which are referred to when it is decided to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state In the state, a bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) to be referred to when it is determined to shift to the bonus state is provided.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state))
The bonus state allocation lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the normal state, when it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, the first bonus is waiting, the second bonus is waiting, the third bonus is waiting It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state allocation lottery table (normal state) is a lottery value in which the first bonus waiting is determined, a lottery value in which the second bonus waiting is determined, and a lottery value in which the third bonus waiting is determined is Bonus It is defined for each winning combination that triggered the transition to the preparation state. For example, in the normal state, if "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, waiting for the first Bonus is determined with the probability of "24852/65536", In the probability of "39858/65536", waiting for the second bonus is determined, and in the probability of "826/65536", waiting for the third bonus is determined.

  In the following, while waiting for the first bonus, waiting for the second bonus, and waiting for the third bonus are collectively referred to as "waiting for bonus."

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance sign state))
The Bonus state assignment lottery table (chance precursor status) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the chance precursor status, when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation status, the first Bonus wait, the second Bonus wait, A third bonus is provided to determine any of the waiting. Here, in the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state), a lottery value in which the first Bonus waiting is determined, a lottery value in which the second Bonus waiting is determined, and a lottery value in which the third Bonus waiting is determined are It is defined for each winning combination that triggered the transition to the bonus preparation state. For example, if "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state in the chance omen state, waiting for the first Bonus is determined with the probability of "24852/65536" The probability of "39858/65536" is determined as waiting for the second Bonus, and the probability of "826/65536" is determined as waiting for the third Bonus.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) have the same value as the lottery value defined according to each winning combination. Although it is prescribed, it is not limited to this, and it is prescribed in the lottery value prescribed in the Bonus status distribution lottery table (normal status) and in the Bonus status distribution lottery table (chance precursor status) The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus status distribution lottery table (chance status))
The bonus state allocation lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the chance state, when it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, the first bonus is waiting, the second bonus is waiting, the third bonus is waiting It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance status) is a lottery value for which the first Bonus waiting is determined, a lottery value for which the second Bonus waiting is determined, and a lottery value for which the third Bonus waiting is determined is the Bonus It is defined for each winning combination that triggered the transition to the preparation state. For example, in the chance state, if "push order bell" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, the first Bonus waiting is determined with the probability of "35768/65536" In the probability of "29749/65536", waiting for the second Bonus is determined, and in the probability of "19/65536", waiting for the third Bonus is determined.

(Precursor game number decision table)
Next, based on FIG. 27, the precursor game number determination table will be described.

  (A) When the transition to the bonus preparation state is determined, the bonus precursor number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the bonus precursor state (FIG. (A) see () and (b) In the normal state, when it is determined to shift to the chance state, a table for determining the number of chance precursor games for determining the number of games to be played in the chance sign state (see FIG. 27 (B)) and (c) in the ART state, when it is determined to shift to the first additional state, the first for determining the number of games to be played in the first additional precursor state If it is determined to shift to the second additional state in the (a) ART state, the second leading state is determined. Allowed and a second plus aura game number determination table for determining the number of games to be able to game with aura state (see FIG. 27 (D)).

(Bonus precursor game number decision table)
The bonus precursor game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and (a) in the normal state, as a result of performing lottery using the bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A), When it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, (b) in the chance precursor state, as a result of performing lottery using the bonus preparation state shift lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B) It is provided to determine the number of games to be transferred to the bonus preparation state when it is determined to shift to the preparation state. Here, the bonus precursor game number determination table defines lottery values for the bonus precursor game number for each winning combination determined to shift to the bonus preparation state. For example, if "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, the "5" game is determined as the number of bonus precursor games with the probability of "49152/65536". The probability of "8192/65536" is determined as "10" games as the number of bonus precursor games, and the probability of "8192/65536" is determined as the number of "bonus precursor games" as "15" games. Note that the determined number of bonus precursor games is set to the value of the number-of-bonus precursor status game counter described later provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Chance signs game number decision table)
The chance precursor game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the normal state, it is determined to shift to the chance state as a result of performing lottery using the chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later. In this case, it is provided to determine the number of games before shifting to the chance state. Here, in the chance precursor game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of chance precursor games is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the chance state. For example, when "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the chance state, the "3" game is determined as the number of chance precursor games with the probability of "49152/65536", The "6" game is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of "8192/65536", and the "9" game is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of "8192/65536". Note that the determined number of chance precursor games is set to the value of the number of chance precursor state games counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub RAM 403.

(First plus precursor sign game number decision table)
The first additional precursor scenario game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state, the first additional condition transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A), which will be described later, is selected as a result of the lottery. When it is determined to shift to the additional state, it is provided to determine the number of games before shifting to the first additional state. Here, in the first addition precursor game number determination table, a lottery value of the first addition precursor game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the first addition state. For example, when "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the first added state, the "2" game is counted as the first added precursor game number with the probability of "32768/65536". Is determined, and the "4" game is determined as the first additional precursor game number with the probability of "32768/65536". Note that the determined first additional precursor game number is set to the value of the later-described first additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403.

(2nd addition precursor game number decision table)
The second additional precursor scenario game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state, the second additional bonus state game selection lottery table (see FIG. 34B) is used to draw the second result. When it is determined to shift to the additional state, it is provided to determine the number of games before shifting to the second additional state. Here, in the second addition precursor game number determination table, a lottery value of the second addition precursor game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the second addition state. For example, if “middle cherry” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the second added state, “2” as the second added precursor game number with the probability of “16384/65536” The game is determined, the probability of “16384/65536” is determined, the “4” game is determined as the second additional precursor game number, and the “6” game is determined as the second additional precursor game number with the probability of “16384/65536” The “8” game is determined as the second additional precursor game number with the probability of “16384/65536”. Note that the determined second additional precursor game number is set to the value of the later-described second additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Chance status transition lottery table)
Next, the chance state transition lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The chance state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to perform a lottery on whether to shift to the chance state in the normal state. Specifically, in the chance state transition lottery table, a lottery value which causes transition to the chance state for each winning combination is defined. For example, when "watermelon" is determined by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined that the state shifts to the chance state with the probability of "3276/65536".

(Fake game number decision table)
Next, based on FIG. 29, the fake game number determination table will be described.

  The fake game number determination table is (a) a normal state fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29A) for determining the number of games for which an effect to shift to the bonus preparation state is expected in the normal state. (B) The ART state fake game number determination table (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29)) for determining the number of games for which an effect of causing transition to the first added state or the second added state is expected in the ART state. B) see).

(Fake game number decision table for normal state)
The normal state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the normal state, as a result of performing drawing using the Bonus preparation state transition drawing table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A), Bonus It is provided to determine the number of games for which an effect of causing transition to the bonus preparation state is performed when it is not determined to shift to the preparation state. Here, in the normal state fake game number determination table, lottery values of the number of fake precursor games are defined for each winning combination. For example, if "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is not determined to shift to the bonus preparation state, the "5" game is determined as the number of fake precursor games with the probability of "49152/65536" In the probability of "8192/65536", the "10" game is determined as the fake precursor game number, and in the probability of "8192/65536", the "15" game is determined as the fake precursor game number. The determined number of fake precursor games is set to the value of a fake game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Fake game number determination table for ART status)
The ART state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state, a first additional state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later and a second additional state transition lottery table described later (see FIG. 34A). As a result of performing the lottery using FIG. 34 (B), if it is not determined to shift to the first additional state and the second additional state, the first additional state or the second additional state is transferred It is provided to determine the number of games that will be played to make them expect. Here, in the ART state fake game number determination table, the lottery value of the ART state fake game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when "watermelon" is determined by the internal lottery process described later, and it is not determined to shift to the first additional state and the second additional state, the fake state for ART state with the probability of "49152/65536""1" game is determined as the number of games, "3" game is determined as the fake precursor game number for ART state with a probability of "8192/65536", and the fake precursor game number for ART state with a probability of "8192/65536" As "5" game is decided. The determined ART state fake precursor game number is set to the value of the below-mentioned ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Promotion lottery table)
Next, the promoted lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is (a) a promotion lottery table (in first Bonus waiting) used when lottery whether or not to promote in the second or second waiting while in the first bonus waiting (FIG. 30 (FIG. (A) (see (B)) and (b) A promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30 (B)) to be used when drawing whether or not to promote during the third bonus while drawing for the second bonus. Have.

(Promotion lottery table (1st Bonus waiting))
The promotion lottery table (while waiting for the first bonus) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is promoted while waiting for the second bonus or waiting for the third bonus, when waiting for the first bonus in the bonus omen or in the condition for the bonus. It is provided in order to draw lottery whether or not to let it go. Specifically, for each winning combination, a lottery value to be promoted while waiting for the second bonus and a lottery value to be promoted while waiting for the third bonus are defined in the promoted lottery table (while waiting for the first bonus). For example, when "weak cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the game is promoted while waiting for the second bonus with the probability of "12785/65536" and the third bonus with the probability of "24/65536". It will be promoted while waiting.

(Promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second bonus) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and it is a lottery whether or not to promote during the third bonus waiting if it is waiting for the second bonus in the bonus omen state or the bonus preparation state. It is provided to Specifically, in the promoted lottery table (during the second bonus), a lottery value to be promoted while waiting for the third bonus is defined for each winning combination. For example, when "weak cherry" is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the game is promoted during the third bonus wait with the probability of "24/65536".

  In addition, if the combination of one of the symbol combinations relating to "Bonus Replay" is displayed on the activated line during the first Bonus waiting, the transition to the first Bonus state is made. In addition, during the second Bonus waiting, when a combination of any of the symbol combinations relating to "Bonus replay" is displayed on the activated line, the transition to the second Bonus state is made. Then, when the combination of any of the symbol combinations relating to "Bonus replay" is displayed on the activated line while waiting for the third Bonus, the state changes to the third Bonus state. For this reason, during the third bonus waiting, it is most advantageous for the player as compared with the first bonus waiting or the second bonus waiting. Therefore, while waiting for the third bonus, the promotion lottery is not performed.

(ART preparation state transition lottery table)
Next, the ART preparation state transition lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The ART preparation state transition lottery table is (a) a first bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31A) used when performing a lottery whether to transition to the ART preparation state in the first bonus state. And (b) in the second bonus state, the second bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) is used when performing lottery for whether to shift to the ART ready state or not. .

(Art preparation state transition lottery table for 1st Bonus state)
The ART preparation state transition lottery table for the first Bonus state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to perform a lottery whether to shift to the ART preparation state in the first Bonus state. Specifically, in the ART preparation state transition lottery table for the first Bonus state, a lottery value which is to be transitioned to the ART preparation state for each winning combination is defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state with the probability of “4096/65536”.

(Art preparation state transition lottery table for 2nd Bonus state)
The ART preparation state transition lottery table for the second Bonus state is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided in the second Bonus state in order to perform lottery for whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Specifically, in the ART preparation state transition lottery table for the second Bonus state, a lottery value which is to be transitioned to the ART preparation state for each winning combination is defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state with the probability of “8192/65536”.

(Art condition game number addition lottery table)
Next, the number-of-games addition lottery table for the ART state will be described based on FIG.

  The ART state game number addition lottery table is (a) in the third bonus state, the ART state game number addition lottery table (number of ART state game numbers used when performing lottery for whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state). 3Bonus state) (see FIG. 32A), (b) ART preparation state or ART state, for ART state used when performing lottery whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in ART state The number-of-games addition lottery table (ART preparation state · ART state) (see FIG. 32B), (c) The first addition precursor state or the second addition precursor state, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added The number-of-ART state game number-added lottery table (additional admonition state) (refer to FIG. 32 (C)) to be used when performing lottery whether or not to In the ART preparation state or the second addition preparation state, the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) used when performing lottery for whether to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state (FIG. 32) (FIG. 32) (D) (see (D)), (e) In the first addition state, the ART state game number addition lottery table (the first addition) used when performing the drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. State (see FIG. 32 (E)) and (f) In the second addition state, the drawing for drawing the number of ART state games used when drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state Table (2nd addition state) (refer to FIG. 32F) and (g) In the second fall standby state, it is used when performing lottery of whether to add the number of games that can be played in ART state Whether or not the number of games that can be played in the ART state is increased in the ART state game number-added lottery table (second fall standby state) (see FIG. 32 (G)) and (h) the third fall standby state The number-of-ART state game number-added lottery table (third fall standby state) (see FIG. 32H) to be used when performing the lottery is provided.

(The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (3rd Bonus state))
Is the number of ART state games added lottery table (third bonus state) provided in the sub ROM 402, and after the end of the third bonus state, is it possible to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state transitioning through the ART preparation state? It is provided in order to perform the lottery of no. Specifically, in the ART state game number-added lottery table (third Bonus state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, "50" games are determined as the number of added games with a probability of "32768/65536", and "16384/65536""100" games are determined as the number of added games by probability, "200" games are determined as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536", and "300" games as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536" Will be determined.

(The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART preparation state · ART state))
The ART state game number-added lottery table (ART preparation state · ART state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in ART preparation state or ART state, based on the winning combination determined by the internal drawing process described later. It is provided to perform a lottery whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, "50" games are determined as the number of added games with a probability of "32768/65536", and "16384/65536""100" games are determined as the number of added games by probability, "200" games are determined as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536", and "300" games as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536" Will be determined.

(Art condition game number addition lottery table (additional warning sign))
The ART state game number addition lottery table (additional admonition state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first additional a posteriori state and the second additional a posteriori state. It is provided in order to make a lottery whether to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number-added lottery table (additional warning state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, "50" games are determined as the number of added games with a probability of "32768/65536", and "16384/65536""100" games are determined as the number of added games by probability, "200" games are determined as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536", and "300" games as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536" Will be determined.

(The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (additional preparation state))
The ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the first addition preparation state or the second addition preparation state, based on the winning combination determined by the internal drawing process described later. It is provided in order to make a lottery whether to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (additional preparation state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, "50" games are determined as the number of added games with a probability of "32768/65536", and "16384/65536""100" games are determined as the number of added games by probability, "200" games are determined as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536", and "300" games as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536" Will be determined.

(Art condition game number addition lottery table (first addition condition))
The ART state game number-added lottery table (first added state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the first added state, it is possible to play in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided in order to make a lottery whether to add the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number added lottery table (first added state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the "100" game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of "32768/65536" and "16384/65536". The probability is that the “200” game is determined as the number of games to be added, and the probability of “16384/65536” is that the “300” game is determined as the number of games to be added.

(Art condition game number addition lottery table (second addition condition))
The ART state game number-added lottery table (second added state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the second added state, it is possible to play in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided in order to make a lottery whether to add the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number added lottery table (second added state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the "100" game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of "16384/65536", and "16384/65536" The probability is that the "200" game is determined as the number of added games, and the probability of "32768/65536" is that the "300" games are determined as the number of added games.

(The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (second falling standby state))
The ART state game number-added lottery table (the second fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the second fall standby state, in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided to make a lottery whether to add the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall fall standby state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, "50" games are determined as the number of added games with a probability of "32768/65536", and "16384/65536""100" games are determined as the number of added games by probability, "200" games are determined as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536", and "300" games as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536" Will be determined.

(The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (the third fall standby state))
The ART state game number-added lottery table (the third fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the third fall standby state, in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided to make a lottery whether to add the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number-added lottery table (the third fall standby state), a lottery value of the number of added games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, "50" games are determined as the number of added games with a probability of "32768/65536", and "16384/65536""100" games are determined as the number of added games by probability, "200" games are determined as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536", and "300" games as the number of added games with probability of "8192/65536" Will be determined.

(Withdraw lottery table)
Next, the withdrawal lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The pull-back lottery table is (a) a first pull-down lottery table for the first fall standby state (see FIG. 33A) used when performing a lottery whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first fall standby state. And (b) in the fourth fall standby state, the fourth fall standby state withdrawal return lottery table (see FIG. 33B) used when performing lottery for whether to shift to the ART state or not There is.

(Withdrawal lottery table for the first fall standby state)
The first fall standby state withdrawal return lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to perform a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first fall standby state. Specifically, in the first fall-waiting state withdrawal withdrawal table, for each winning combination, a lottery value that causes transition to the ART preparation state is defined. For example, when “watermelon replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined that the state shifts to the ART preparation state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Withdrawal lottery table for fourth fall standby state)
The fourth fall standby state withdrawal return lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to perform lottery whether or not to shift to the ART state in the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, in the fourth fall standby state withdrawal withdrawal table, for each winning combination, a lottery value for transitioning to the ART state is defined. For example, when “watermelon replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined that the state shifts to the ART state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Additional state transition lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 34, the additional state transition lottery table will be described.

  The added state transition lottery table includes (a) a first added state transition lottery table (refer to FIG. 34A) used when performing a lottery whether to shift to the first added state, and (b) the second A second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) is used which is used when performing a drawing to determine whether to shift to the added state.

(First additional state transition lottery table)
The first additional state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to perform a lottery as to whether or not to transition to the first additional state in the ART state. Specifically, the first added state transition lottery table defines, for each winning combination, a lottery value that is to be transferred to the first added state. For example, when “strong cherry” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined that the first additional state is to be entered with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(2nd addition state transition lottery table)
The second added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided to perform a drawing of whether or not to shift to the second added state in the ART state. Specifically, the second added state transition lottery table defines, for each winning combination, a lottery value to be transferred to the second added state. For example, when "middle cherry" is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, it is determined that the state shifts to the second additional state with a probability of "32768/65536".

(Program start processing by main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the power is off. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state, and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1 In the process, it is determined whether or not the game machine 1 is powered off by the backup power supply. Then, if it is determined that power interruption is in progress (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not broken (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
At step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets an address of a table for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs processing such as setting the address of the register based on the table. And if the process of step S2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates a checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing of setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S3 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change key switch 49 sw is turned ON by being rotated by a predetermined angle while the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is rotated by a predetermined angle while the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S5, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S4) The process proceeds to the power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption or the value of the stored stack pointer.

  Note that when the power-off recovery process is completed, the state of the gaming machine 1 is restored to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the door open / close sensor is ON. In the present embodiment, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, so that the door open / close sensor 17s is turned on. It becomes. Therefore, in step S5, the main CPU 301 inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5 and is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and whether the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more Perform processing to judge. When it is determined that the door open / close sensor is ON (step S5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S7, and when it is determined that the door open / close sensor is OFF (step S5 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change key switch 49 sw is ON (step S 4 = Yes) and the door open / close sensor 17 s is OFF (step S 5 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle Nevertheless, in a state in which the setting change key is inserted, it is turned by a predetermined angle. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag in the setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S6 ends, the process proceeds to the power failure recovery process described above.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to transmit the setting change start command to the sub control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change start command” is a command having information etc. indicating that the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on to start changing the setting value. And if the process of step S7 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs setting value change processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current setting value, determines whether or not the range of the setting value is normal, and when the determination result is normal, the stored sheet number indicator 28 or A process of displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. On the other hand, when the above-described determination result is not normal, the process of setting the initial set value of the set value in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, on the basis of the fact that the main CPU 301 detects the operation of the setting change button 45 by the setting change switch 45sw, the main CPU 301 switches the setting value, and the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Based on the setting value determination process, the main RAM 303 sets the setting value based on the fact that the setting change key rotated by the predetermined angle is detected to be able to be pulled out. A process of storing in the set value storage area provided is performed. And if the process of step S8 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to transmit the setting change end command to the sub control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change end command” is a command having information indicating that the change of the setting value has been completed, or information related to the setting value after the change. And if the process of step S9 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the door open / close sensor is off. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the door open / close sensor 17s is off. When it is determined that the door open / close sensor is off (step S10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S11, and when it is determined that the door open / close sensor is not off (step S10 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a door close command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the door close command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door close command to the sub control board 400. . Here, the “door close command” is a command having information that the front door 3 is closed. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a door open command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to set the door open command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door open command to the sub control board 400. . Here, the “door open command” is a command having information that the front door 3 is open. Then, when the process of step S12 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 36).

(Main loop processing by main control board 300)
Next, main loop processing performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address of the main RAM 303 and the initialization end address, and then from the initialization start address of the main RAM 303 to the initialization end address area Perform processing such as initializing the area of. And if the process of step S101 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs game start management processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the pressure reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform processing such as clearing the value. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing of turning on the operation enable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 and the MAX BET button 8 in the operation enable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S102 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing of automatically inserting medals, etc., when a replay operation flag described later is ON. And if the process of step S103 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs setting value confirmation processing. Specifically, when the medal is not inserted and the setting change key switch 49 sw is ON, the main CPU 301 sets the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of displaying the value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. And if the process of step S104 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. In the processing, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when the replaying operation flag described later is not ON, and when the medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, It is determined whether the processing of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 or the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAX BET button 8 is detected, and the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAX BET button 8 is detected If the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected. A process of returning the medals being played back to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 executes processing to determine whether the value of the insertion number counter is "3". Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start processing of step S103 and the medal management processing of step S105. Do the processing. When it is determined that the value of the insertion number counter is “3” (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107, and it is determined that the value of the insertion number counter is not “3”. In the case (step S106 = No), the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs start lever check processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the start switch 10 sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the start switch 10 sw is ON. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S108 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109, and when it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S108 = No), The process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 executes an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later using FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs symbol code setting processing which will be described in detail later using FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the stop control number based on the winning combination determined in the process of step S109 and storing the stop control number in the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S110 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing such as setting the minimum game time. And if the process of step S111 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs pre-reel stop processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs, for example, pull-in prediction processing on the rotating left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs flag setting processing during reel rotation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information to the effect that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating in the reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing to clear the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the operation enable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 and the MAX BET button 8 in the operation enable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to set the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Perform processing for fast rotation. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the operation enable state flag corresponding to the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the operation possible state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to ON. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs a process during reel rotation which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11 sw, the middle stop switch 12 sw, and the right stop switch 13 sw have detected that the player has stopped the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A process of stopping the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all the reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 have stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. When it is determined that all the reels have stopped (step S118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119. When it is determined that all the reels have not stopped (step S118 = No), The process proceeds to step S117, and the same process is repeatedly performed until all the reels are stopped.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts in accordance with the combination of winning symbols. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the hopper 202 through the power supply substrate 200 based on the combination of the symbols relating to the "winning" being displayed on the activated line, thereby processing for paying out the medals. Do. And if the process of step S120 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs gaming state transition processing which will be described in detail later using FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the main loop process is repeatedly performed.

(Start lever check process)
Next, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the start switch 10 sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and when it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S107). -1 = No), the subroutine of the start lever check process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to set the replay operation flag OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to set the value of the replay operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to OFF. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the subroutine of the start lever check process ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 38, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 38 is a view showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a pre-lottery error check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an error detection process before determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process. And if the process of step S109-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-2.

  When an error is detected by the pre-lottery error check process of step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs an unreturnable error process.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs hard random number acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304, and performs processing of storing the extracted random number value in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an initial value of the winning number when determining the winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 acquires “39” as an initial value of the winning number and performs processing of storing the value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a second winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) stored in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is "24" or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the winning number acquiring process of step S109-5 is "24" or more. When it is determined that the winning number is "24" or more (step S109-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not "24" or more. In the case (step S109-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs gaming state acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a first winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a first winning combination determination table in accordance with the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of step S109-7. For example, when the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the first RT gaming state, processing for setting the first winning combination determination table (see FIG. 14) for the first RT gaming state is performed. . Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs lottery data acquisition processing. Specifically, based on the first winning combination determination table set by the process of step S109-8 and the winning number stored in the register, the main CPU 301 selects data relating to the winning combination corresponding to the winning number. Perform processing to acquire. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not a lottery is to be performed, based on the data relating to the winning combination acquired by the lottery data acquisition processing of step S109-9. Here, in the present embodiment, when the lottery value corresponding to the winning number is “0”, the main CPU 301 determines that the lottery is not performed. When it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and when it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = No). And the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S109-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not all setting common values. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number acquired by the lottery data acquisition processing in step S109-9 is the same lottery value regardless of the set value. Then, if it is determined that the setting common value is set (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-13, and if it is determined that the setting common value is not set (step S109). −11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs set value classified lottery value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first winning combination currently set based on the value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. A lottery value of the table or the second winning combination determination table is acquired and stored in a register. And if the process of step S109-12 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-14.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs all setting common lottery value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the lottery value of the first winning combination determination table currently set or the second winning combination determination table based on the winning numbers stored in the register, and stores them in the register. Do the process. And if the process of step S109-13 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs lottery confirmation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process per setting value in step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register, or the common setting common lottery value acquisition process in step S109-13. The lottery value obtained by the above is subtracted, and the value of the register in which the random value is stored is updated to the value after subtraction and stored. And if the process of step S109-14 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-15.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the game has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is a lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value of step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S109-14, or step S109-13. As a result of performing the process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the all setting common lottery value acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the value is a negative value. When it is determined that the player has won (step S109-15 = Yes), the subroutine of the internal lottery process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has not won (step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16.

  When it is determined that the player has won (step S109-15 = Yes), the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stored in the register is determined.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 executes a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. And if the process of step S109-16 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S109-17.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the winning number is "0". Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number has become “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number stored in the register in the process of step S109-16. Do the process. Then, if it is determined that the value of the winning number is "0" (step S109-17 = Yes), the subroutine of the internal lottery process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S109-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the winning number becomes “0” (step S109-17 = YES), “loss” is determined as the winning combination.

(Symbol code setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 39, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs stop control number acquisition processing. Specifically, main CPU 301 stores the winning combination of the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S109 as the stop control number in the stop control number storage area provided in main RAM 303 and sets it in the register. Do the processing. And if the process of step S110-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs display permission symbol bit setting processing. Specifically, based on the stop control number acquired by the stop control number acquisition process of step S110-1, the main CPU 301 permits display which is information relating to the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the activated line. Perform processing to set the symbol bit. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start acceptance command to sub control board 400. Do the process. Here, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command including information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. And if the process of step S110-3 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a turning drum effect lottery process. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing to draw lottery whether or not to perform a turning drum effect to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20, and provided in the main RAM 303 when the lottery is won. A process is performed to store information related to the winning trunk effect in the current spinning drum effect information storage area. And if the process of step S110-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-5.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing of setting a condition device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to set the condition device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the condition device command to the sub control board 400. . Here, the “conditional device command” is a command having information related to the winning combination, information related to the turning drum effect to be executed, and the like. When the process of step S110-5 is completed, the subroutine of the symbol code setting process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start preparation processing)
Next, based on FIG. 40, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a rotating drum effect setting process. Specifically, based on the information stored in the rotating drum effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information for executing the rotating drum effect, and Performs processing to execute the trunk effect. Then, when the process of step S111-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the minimum game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set in the process of step S111-3 described later has become “0” in the previous game. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (step S111-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-3, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed ( Step S111-2 = No), the process of step S111-2 is repeatedly executed until the minimum game time has elapsed.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing to set the minimum game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 prevents the time from the process of step S111-3 in the previous game to the process of step S111-2 in the current game to be less than the minimum game time, in order to suppress the proviso for the game. The minimum game time is set in the timer counter. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum game time is about "4.1" seconds. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start command to the sub control board 400. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started. Then, when the process of step S111-4 ends, the subroutine of the reel rotation start preparation process ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Reel stop pre-processing)
Next, based on FIG. 41, the reel stop pre-processing performed by the processing of step S112 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S112-1)
In step S112-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an estimated pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data “100B” corresponding to the right reel 20 in the register as an estimated pull-in reel search initial value. Then, when the process of step S112-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-2.

(Step S112-2)
In step S112-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 selects the left as the search target based on the initial value of the expected reel retrieval found in the process of step S112-1 or the value of the search target reel updated in step S112-4 described later. A process is performed to determine whether the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. When it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S112-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S112-3, and when it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S112) 2 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-4.

(Step S112-3)
In step S112-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in forecasting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets an initial value of the virtual stop position, acquires the pull-in priority according to the virtual stop position, and stores the acquired priority in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 I do. Then, when the process of step S112-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-4.

  Note that the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing data stored in the lead-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing by the lead-in prediction processing of step S112-3.

(Step S112-4)
In step S112-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, when the main CPU 301 determines that the search target reel is stopped (step S112-2 = No), or in the pull-in prediction process of step S112-3, the pull-in prediction process of the search target reel is When it is finished, in order to obtain the next search target reel, the value set in the register is shifted to the right. Then, when the process of step S112-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-5.

(Step S112-5)
In step S112-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the processing for all the reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not pull-in anticipation processing for all reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 has ended. Then, if it is determined that the processing of all the reels is completed (step S112-5 = Yes), the subroutine of the pre-reel stop processing is completed, and the process proceeds to step S113 of the main loop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing for all reels is not completed (step S112-5 = No), the processing proceeds to step S112-2 and all the left reel 18, middle reel 19 and right reel 20 are processed. The same process is repeatedly executed until the pull-in forecasting process for the reels is completed.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 42, the reel in-rotation processing that is performed by the processing of step S117 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during reel rotation.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the stop button is pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw have detected the player's operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 or not. Perform processing to judge. When it is determined that the stop button is pressed (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and when it is determined that the stop button is not pressed (step S117). -1 = No), the subroutine of the processing during reel rotation is ended, and the processing is shifted to step S118 of the main loop processing.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the operable state flag. Specifically, based on the operated left stop button 11, middle stop button 12 and right stop button 13, the main CPU 301 controls the left stop button 11 of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the middle A process of turning off the operable state flag corresponding to the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-3.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs pressing information storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20, and the left stepping motor corresponding to the operated stop button among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A pressing reference position is acquired based on the value of the pulse counter supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs sliding frame number acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided with a slide number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, a winning combination determined by the internal lottery process, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, the right A process of acquiring the number of sliding symbols is performed based on the operation order of the stop button 13 or the like. Here, in the present embodiment, as the number of sliding symbols, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine the number of sliding symbols within the range of “0” to “4”. Then, when the process of step S117-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 selects the reel based on the pressing reference position saved by the pressing information saving process of step S117-3 and the number of sliding symbols acquired by the sliding symbol number acquiring process of step S117-4. Perform processing to stop. And if the process of step S117-5 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S117-6.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the reel stop command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel stop command to the sub control board 400. . Here, the “reel stop command” is a command having information on the pressing reference position, the number of sliding symbols, and the like. Then, when the process of step S117-6 is completed, the subroutine of the process during reel rotation is ended, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, the display determination process performed by the process of step S119 in FIG. 36 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display determination processing subroutine.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a display determination command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the display determination command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the display determination command to the sub control board 400. . Here, the "display determination command" is a command having information and the like regarding the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. Then, when the process of step S119-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols relating to "blank" is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S119-2 = Yes), the display determination processing subroutine is ended, and the processing proceeds to step S120 of the main loop processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the blank is not displayed (step S119-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is achieved. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols relating to "winning" is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that the winning is achieved (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and when it is determined that the winning is not achieved (step S119-3). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-5.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 executes payout amount calculation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on a combination of symbols relating to “winning” displayed on the activated line. Then, when the process of step S119-4 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not replay has been established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that the replay is established (step S119-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6, and when it is determined that the replay is not established (step S119-5). = No), the display determination processing subroutine ends, and the processing proceeds to step S120 of the main loop processing.

(Step S119-6)
At step S119-6, the main CPU 301 carries out processing to set the replay operation flag ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the value of the replay operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Playing state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 44, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S121 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1)
In step S121-1, the main CPU 301 performs an RT gaming state transition process which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing to shift the RT gaming state based on the current gaming state and the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line. Then, when the process of step S121-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-2.

(Step S121-2)
In step S121-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a game end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to set the game end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game end command to the sub control board 400. . Here, the “game end command” is a command having information indicating that the game has ended, information related to the game state, and the like. When the process of step S121-2 is completed, the subroutine of the gaming state transition process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the RT gaming state transition process performed by the process of step S121-1 of FIG. 44 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-1)
In step S121-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not a gaming state transition symbol has been displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is a combination of symbols relating to "blank", a combination of symbols relating to "prepare replay", a combination of symbols relating to "Bonus replay", a combination of symbols relating to "ART replay", "special A process is performed to determine whether any combination of symbols among the combination of symbols related to "replay" or the combination of symbols related to "RUSH replay" is displayed on the effective line. When the gaming state transition symbol is displayed (step S121-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-2, and it is determined that the gaming state transition symbol is not displayed. (Step S121-1-1 = No), the subroutine of the RT gaming state transition process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-2)
In step S121-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs gaming state acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-1-3.

(Step S121-1-3)
In step S121-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether it is time to shift to the gaming state. Specifically, as shown in the gaming state transition diagram (see FIG. 21), the main CPU 301 displays, for example, the case where a combination of symbols relating to "blank" is displayed in the non-RT gaming state, etc., step S121-1- Based on the combination of the gaming state acquired in the second gaming state acquisition processing and the symbols displayed on the activated line, it is determined whether it is time to transition to the gaming state or not. When it is determined that the game state transition time is reached (step S121-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-4, and it is determined that the game state transition time is not reached. (Step S121-1-3 = No), the subroutine of the RT gaming state transition process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-4)
In step S121-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs gaming state setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is a gaming state provided in the main RAM 303 based on a combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of step S121-1-2 and the symbols displayed on the activated line. Perform processing to update the storage area value. When the process of step S121-1-4 is completed, the subroutine of the RT gaming state transition process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Interrupt process)
Next, interrupt processing will be described based on FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S201, the main CPU 301 performs a process of saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. And if the process of step S201 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving predetermined signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the setting switch board 250. And if the process of step S202 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output data setting processing. Specifically, when there is a request for output of an external signal relating to an error, the main CPU 301 performs processing of setting output port data of the external concentrated terminal board 47 and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer for effect at the time of spinning drum effect, the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time, and the like. And if the process of step S204 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 executes a process of setting "3" as a reel number. Specifically, in the reel drive control process of step S206 described later, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting "3" as a reel number in order to set a target of a reel to be drive-controlled. And if the process of step S205 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs reel drive control processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets, via the reel control board 150, the left reel 18 corresponding to the reel number set by the process of step S205 or the reel number set by the process of step S207 described later. By driving the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 of the reel 19, the right reel 20, acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration control of the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, etc. Do. And if the process of step S206 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S207.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs drive control of the right reel 20 when the reel number is “3”, and performs drive control of the middle reel 19 when the reel number is “2”. When the reel number is "1", drive control of the left reel 18 is performed.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 executes a process of subtracting "1" from the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes a process of subtracting "1" from the reel number currently set in the register. And if the process of step S207 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether the reel number is "0". Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the reel drive control processing of step S206 has been performed on all the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When it is determined that the reel number is "0" (step S208 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the reel number is not "0" (step S208). = No), the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the output port data of the external concentrated terminal board 47 and the like. And if the process of step S209 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs LED output data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls the start lamp 24, the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, the third BET lamp 27, the number-of-reserves display 28, the number-of-payouts display 29, the insertable display lamp 30 and the replay display A process of creating display data of the lamp 31 is performed. And if the process of step S210 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S211.

  When the main CPU 301 creates display data for lighting the replaying display lamp 31 in the LED output data creation process of step S210, the main CPU 301 controls to turn on the replaying display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303. When the display data for turning off the replaying display lamp 31 is created, control is performed to turn off the replaying display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303.

(Step S211)
In step S211, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls the start lamp 24, the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, the third BET lamp 27, the number-of-reserves display 28, the number-of-payouts display 29, the insertable display lamp 30 and the replay display The lamp 31 is controlled. And if the process of step S211 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S212.

(Step S212)
In step S212, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub control board 400. And if the process of step S212 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S213.

(Step S213)
In step S213, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of transmitting a predetermined signal to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S213 ends, the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S214)
In step S214, the main CPU 301 performs register recovery processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of restoring the value of the saved register in the processing of step S201. Then, when the process of step S214 is completed, the interrupt process is ended and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing in sub control board)
Next, main processing in the sub control board will be described based on FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs initialization processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing such as error check of the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S301 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main board communication processing which will be described in detail later using FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 detects a specific output trigger of the system sound described later (a sound in which the sub CPU 401 transmits an audio output command directly to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 and the sound source IC 605 performs audio output). When a command indicating a result (for example, detection of an error or detection of an operation related to a game such as lever operation) is received from the main control board 300, voice data to be output according to the detection result is specified, An output designation command of audio data is transmitted to the effect control board 600. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for transmitting a rendering designation command to the rendering control board 600 based on the rendering content determined by the below-described sub rendering determination processing. In the effect control board 600, the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, the lower right part via the amplifier board 500 by the liquid crystal control CPU 601, the sound source IC 605, etc. A process of outputting sound from the speaker 43 is performed. The processing by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 will be described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp control processing. For example, the sub CPU 401 displays the bonus display unit 32, the ART display unit 33, the RUSH display unit 34, and the stop button operation display via the control panel LED relay substrate 700 based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The unit 35 controls the start lever LED 36, the MAX BET button LED 721, the stop button LED 722, the effect button LED 723, and the waist panel LED 724. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs the rendering device 50, the left rendering device motor 651, and the right rendering device via the rendering control board 600 and the rendering device drive substrate 650 based on the rendering content determined by the below-described sub rendering determination process. The motor 654, the left liquid crystal lifting motor 657, and the right liquid crystal lifting motor 660 are controlled. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 transmits an effect designation command to the effect control board 600 based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determination process described later, and the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 controls the liquid crystal display device 46. Control the Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for executing a predetermined process when the effect button detection sensor 710 sw detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key board 711 detects an operation of the cross key 22. . Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the main board communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main substrate communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether a different command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time. When it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2, and when it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). -1 = No), the subroutine of the main board communication process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs game information storage processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 creates game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command, and stores the game information in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs command analysis processing which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored in the process of step S302-2. Then, when the process of step S302-3 ends, the subroutine of the main board communication process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis process)
Next, based on FIG. 49, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 48 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs command-based processing which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing in accordance with the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining lamp data corresponding to the effect contents determined by the command-based process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining sound data corresponding to the effect contents determined by the command-based process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining image data corresponding to the effect contents determined by the command-based process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4 is completed, the subroutine of the command analysis process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Process by command)
Next, based on FIG. 50, the command-based process performed by the process of step S302-3-1 in FIG. 49 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing by command.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether a condition device command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the command received from the main control board 300 is a condition device command. Then, if it is determined that the received command is a condition device command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is a condition If it is determined that the command is not a device command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon condition device command reception, which will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the condition device command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6.

(Step S302-3-1-3)
In step S302-3-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the command received from the main control board 300 is a display determination command. When it is determined that the received command is the display determination command (step S302-3-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is not the determination command (step S302-3-1-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S 302-3-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing upon reception of a display determination command, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the display determination command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6.

(Step S302-3-1-5)
In step S302-3-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing in accordance with the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing in accordance with the command received from the main control board 300. And if the process of step S302-3-1-5 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-6.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs sub effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the processing at the time of condition device command reception at step S302-3-1-2, the processing at the time of display determination command reception at step S302-3-1-4, and the processing according to the received command. Based on the result of the execution and the effect determination table (see FIG. 24), a process of determining an effect to be performed by the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-6 is completed, the subroutine of the process by command is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when conditional device command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the conditional device command reception process carried out by the process of step S302-3-1-2 in FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing upon condition device command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs state-based transition processing. Specifically, sub CPU 401 performs processing in accordance with the state managed by sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in sub RAM 403. Here, in the transition processing by state in step S302-3-1-2-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 52 to 71). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the chance state win flag is ON based on the value of the chance state win flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the chance state winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-3, and the chance state is determined. If it is determined that the winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-2 = No), the subroutine of the conditional device command reception process is ended, and the step S302-3-1 of the processing by command is performed. Move the processing to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-3 is completed, the subroutine of the process upon reception of the conditional device command is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the process by command.

(Processing for normal state)
Next, based on FIG. 52, in the state-specific transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 in FIG. 51, processing for normal state performed when the state managed by sub control board 400 is the normal state Explain about FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-2-1.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2)
In step S 302-3-1-1-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is "1" or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. If the process proceeds to 1-1-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not "1" or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-3)
In step S 302-3-1-1-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. When it is determined that the winning number is "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1-1-5. If it is determined that the winning number is not "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-4 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. Move the processing to 1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third bonus game for state number game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the third bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-6 is finished, the subroutine of the process for normal state is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter is "0". Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1, resulting in the sub RAM 403. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in has become "0". When it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302. The processing shifts to -3-1-2-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus waiting distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is waiting for the first bonus, second waiting for the second bonus, and third bonus based on the bonus status distribution lottery table (normal status) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process is performed to determine which one is on standby. The sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when any one of the first bonus waiting, the second bonus waiting, and the third bonus waiting is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-9)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-9-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-9 is completed, the subroutine of the normal state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-10)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command and the bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25A). Based on the process, a lottery process is performed to determine whether to shift to the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-10 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the bonus preparation state is determined as a result of the lottery by the bonus preparation state shift lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-10. Do the process. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-12. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-12)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus waiting distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is waiting for the first bonus, second waiting for the second bonus, and third bonus based on the bonus status distribution lottery table (normal status) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process is performed to determine which one is on standby. The sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when any one of the first bonus waiting, the second bonus waiting, and the third bonus waiting is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-12 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-13)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the bonus bonus game based on the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command and the bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games before transition to the preparation state is determined, and processing is performed to set the value of the number-of-bonuses precursor state game counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-13 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-14)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus precursor state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-14 is finished, the subroutine of the process for normal state is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-15)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-1-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state lottery process. Specifically, sub CPU 401 shifts to the chance state based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 28) provided in sub ROM 402. Perform a process of lottery whether or not. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-15 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-16)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the chance state is determined as a result of the lottery by the chance state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-1-15. I do. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-17, If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-17)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as a chance precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance precursor state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-18.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-18)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state win flag of the chance state win flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-19)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the chance precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27B) provided in the sub ROM 402 to determine the chance. The number of precursor games before transition to the state is determined, and the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-20.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-20)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-1-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the chance state winning flag is OFF based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when it is determined that the chance state winning flag is OFF (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-20 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1-1-21. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is not OFF (step S 302-3-1-2-1-20 = No), the subroutine for normal state processing ends The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-21)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-1-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the normal state fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of fake games is determined, and the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-21 ends, the subroutine for the normal state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Process for chance sign state)
Next, based on FIG. 53, in the state-specific transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the chance precursor state to be performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the chance precursor state. Description of the processing for FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the process for chance precursor state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is "05". Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. When it is determined that the winning number is "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2-2-3 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. Transfer the processing to -2-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third bonus game for state number game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the third bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-4 is finished, the subroutine of the process of chance precursor state is finished, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-2, thereby obtaining the sub RAM 403. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in has become "0". When it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302. The process shifts to -3-1-2-1-2-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-2-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus waiting distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is waiting for the first bonus, second waiting for the second bonus, and the second waiting for the second based on the bonus status distribution lottery table (chance precursor status) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. 3Bonus Performs processing to determine which one is waiting. The sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when any one of the first bonus waiting, the second bonus waiting, and the third bonus waiting is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-7 is finished, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-2-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-2-8 is ended, the subroutine of the process for the chance precursor state process is ended, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is performed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command, and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25B). Based on the process of drawing lottery whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-2-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-2-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-10)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the bonus preparation state is determined as a result of the lottery by the bonus preparation state shift lottery process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-9. Do the process. Then, if it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-2-11. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-2-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus waiting distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is waiting for the first bonus, second waiting for the second bonus, and the second waiting for the second based on the bonus status distribution lottery table (chance precursor status) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. 3Bonus Performs processing to determine which one is waiting. The sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when any one of the first bonus waiting, the second bonus waiting, and the third bonus waiting is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-2-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-12)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the bonus bonus game based on the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command and the bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games before transition to the preparation state is determined, and processing is performed to set the value of the number-of-bonuses precursor state game counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-13)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus precursor state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-2-13 is finished, the subroutine of the process of chance precursor state is finished, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-14)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the chance precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-5. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. Then, if it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1. The process proceeds to 2-1-2-15, and when it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-14) = No), the subroutine for the chance precursor state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-1-15)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-1-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-16)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to turn off the chance state selection flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state win flag of the chance state win flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-1-16 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2-1-2-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2-17)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-2-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the game number counter for chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the game counter for the chance state provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-2-17 is finished, the subroutine of the process of chance precursor state is finished, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Process for Bonus precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 54, in the state-specific transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the Bonus precursor state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is a Bonus precursor state Description of the processing for FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the process for bonus precursor state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-3-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is "1" or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. The process proceeds to 1-3-3, and when it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not "1" or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-2-3-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set “0” to the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. When it is determined that the winning number is "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1-3-5 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. Transfer the processing to -3-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third bonus game for state number game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-3-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the third bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-6 is finished, the subroutine of the process for bonus precursor state process is finished, and the process of step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is performed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the processing of step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-1, resulting in the sub RAM 403. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in has become "0". And when it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-7 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302. Transfer the processing to -3-1-2-1-3-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-8 is finished, the subroutine of the process for bonus precursor state process is finished, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is performed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-9)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the first bonus is waiting or the second bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of determining whether or not the first bonus is waiting or the second bonus is waiting based on the value of the bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the first bonus is waiting or the second bonus is waiting (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. If it is determined that the process is shifted to -3-10 and the first or second bonus is not determined (step S302-3-1-2-1-3 = No), step S302 is performed. Transfer the processing to -3-1-2-1-3-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-10)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-3-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 refers to the promotion lottery table (during the first Bonus waiting) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 30A). Or any of the promoted lottery tables (during second Bonus waiting) (see FIG. 30B), and the selected promoted lottery table and information on the winning combination included in the condition device command are selected. On the basis of the first bonus waiting, the drawing of whether the second bonus or waiting for the third bonus, and the second bonus waiting, the drawing of whether or not the third bonus waiting A process of storing the lottery result in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-3-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-11)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter for bonus prognostic state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number-of-bonus precursor state game counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-3-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-12)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value of the game number counter for Bonus precursor state is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1. The process proceeds to 2-1-3-13, and in the case where it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-12) = No), the subroutine for the Bonus precursor state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the process when the conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-3-13)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-3-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-3-3-13 is completed, the subroutine of the process for the bonus precursor state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is performed. Transfer the process to

(Processing for chance state)
Next, based on FIG. 55, in the state-specific transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, processing for a chance state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is a chance state Explain about FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for chance state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-4-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-4-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-2-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. When it is determined that the winning number is "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1-4-3. If it is determined that the winning number is not "05" (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. Move the processing to -4-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third bonus game for state number game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-3 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-4-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the third bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-4-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the game number counter for chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the game counter for the chance state provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-5 is finished, the subroutine of the process for chance state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-1, resulting in the sub RAM 403. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in has become "0". Then, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302. Transfer the processing to -3-1-2-1-4-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus waiting distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is waiting for the first bonus, second waiting for the second bonus, and third bonus based on the bonus status distribution lottery table (chance status) (see FIG. 26C) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process is performed to determine which one is on standby. The sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when any one of the first bonus waiting, the second bonus waiting, and the third bonus waiting is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-4-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-8 is finished, the subroutine of the process for chance state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-9)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter for chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the game counter for the chance state provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-4-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-10)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command and the bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 25C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Based on the process, a lottery process is performed to determine whether to shift to the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-4-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-11)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-11, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process for the chance state in step S302-3-1-2-1-4-10. Perform processing to determine whether Then, if it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-4-1. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-12)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a bonus waiting distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is waiting for the first bonus, second waiting for the second bonus, and third bonus based on the bonus status distribution lottery table (chance status) (see FIG. 26C) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process is performed to determine which one is on standby. The sub CPU 401 performs processing for storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when any one of the first bonus waiting, the second bonus waiting, and the third bonus waiting is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-4-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-13)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-13 is finished, the subroutine of the process for chance state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-14)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-9, A process is performed to determine whether the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become "0". Then, if it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. If it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-14 = No) And the subroutine for the process for chance state is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the process for receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-4-15)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-4-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to make the state managed by the sub control board 400 a normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-4-15 is completed, the subroutine of the process for chance state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the process when the conditional device command is received. Migrate the process.

(Process for preparation of Bonus)
Next, based on FIG. 56, in the state-specific transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the Bonus preparation state to be performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state. Description of the processing for FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for preparation of the bonus state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-5-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is "05". Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. When it is determined that the winning number is "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1-5-2 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not "05" (step S302-3-1-2-5-1 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. Move processing to -5-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-5-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third bonus game for state number game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1--5-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-5-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the third bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-5-3 is completed, the subroutine of the process for preparation of the bonus state is ended, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the process upon reception of the condition device command is performed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-5-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-5-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the first bonus is waiting or the second bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of determining whether or not the first bonus is waiting or the second bonus is waiting based on the value of the bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the first bonus is waiting or the second bonus is waiting (step S302-3-1-2-1-5-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process proceeds to step -5-5, and if it is determined that the first bonus is not being waited or the second bonus is not being waited (step S302-3-1-2-1-5-4 = No), the bonus is prepared. The state process subroutine is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-5-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-5-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, the sub CPU 401 refers to the promotion lottery table (during the first Bonus waiting) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 30A). Or any of the promoted lottery tables (during second Bonus waiting) (see FIG. 30B), and the selected promoted lottery table and information on the winning combination included in the condition device command are selected. On the basis of the first bonus waiting, the drawing of whether the second bonus or waiting for the third bonus, and the second bonus waiting, the drawing of whether or not the third bonus waiting A process of storing the lottery result in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-5-5 is completed, the subroutine of the process for preparation of the bonus state is ended, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the process upon reception of the condition device command is performed. Transfer the process to

(Processing for the first Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 57, in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the first Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first Bonus state Description of the processing for FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus game for state number game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus game for state number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-6-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs ART preparation state transition lottery processing. Specifically, under the condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in sub RAM 403 is OFF, sub CPU 401 holds the winning combination included in the condition device command. The process of drawing whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state is performed based on the information related to and the first Bonus state ART preparation state transition drawing table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state is determined as a result of the lottery by the ART preparation state transition lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-2. Do the process. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-4. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning ON the ART winning flag of the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the first bonus game for state number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the first Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1-1. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the first Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-6-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If it is determined that the process proceeds to 2-1-6-6 and the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-6-5) = No), the subroutine for the first Bonus state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the ART winning flag is ON, based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-1-6-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-7. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-1-6-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6. Move the processing to -9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-7)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-6-6-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to turn off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag of the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-8 is completed, the subroutine for the first Bonus state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-6-9)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-6-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-6-9 is finished, the subroutine of the first bonus state process is finished, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Processing for the second Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 58, in the state-basis transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the second Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second Bonus state Description of the processing for FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the second number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs ART preparation state transition lottery processing. Specifically, under the condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in sub RAM 403 is OFF, sub CPU 401 holds the winning combination included in the condition device command. The process of drawing whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state is performed based on the information pertaining to and the second Bonus state ART preparation state transition drawing table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state is determined as a result of the lottery by the ART preparation state transition lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-2. Do the process. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-7-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-4. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-7-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning ON the ART winning flag of the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-7-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the second Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-7-1. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the second Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. When it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-7-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If it is determined that the process proceeds to 2-1-7-6 and the value of the second bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-7-5) = No), the subroutine for the second Bonus state process is ended, and the process proceeds to Step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-7-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the ART winning flag is ON, based on the value stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-1-7-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-7. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-1-7-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7. Move the processing to -9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-7)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-7-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-7-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-7-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning the ART winning flag OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag of the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-8 is completed, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-7-9)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-7-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-7-9 is completed, the subroutine for the second bonus state process is ended, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is performed. Transfer the process to

(Process for 3rd Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 59, in the state-basis transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the third Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third Bonus state Description of the processing for FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-8-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the third bonus game for the state of the state provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-8-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-8-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-8-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (third bonus state) (FIG. 32A) Based on the reference), it is lottery processing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-8-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-8-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-8-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-8-2. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-8-4. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-8-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-8-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-8-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process in step S 302-3-1-2-1-8-2. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-8-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-8-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-8-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-8-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the third bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-8-1. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become "0". When it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-8-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If it is determined that the process proceeds to 2-1-8-6 and the value of the third bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-8-5) = No), the subroutine for the third Bonus state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-8-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-8-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-8-6 is completed, the subroutine of the process for the third Bonus state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the process upon reception of the condition device command is performed. Transfer the process to

(Processing for the first fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 60, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. A description will be given of the one-drop standby processing. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-9-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-9-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a first fall-off standby state withdrawal return lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command and the first fall standby state withdrawal return lottery table (see FIG. 33A) provided in the sub ROM 402 On the basis of this, after the Bonus state ends, a process of drawing whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-9-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-9-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-9-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-9-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, whether the sub CPU 401 has decided to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery by the first fall fall standby state withdrawal withdrawal process in step S 302-3-1-2-1-9-1 Perform processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-9-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-9-3. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-9-2 = No), the subroutine of the first fall standby processing is ended, and the condition device command reception processing step The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-9-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-9-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-9-3 ends, the subroutine of the first fall standby state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process proceeds. Move the processing to -2.

(Process for ART preparation state)
Next, based on FIG. 61, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the ART preparation state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART preparation state Description of the processing for FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART preparation state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-10-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-10-1, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. Based on (B), a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-10-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-10-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-10-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the player has won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-1-10-1. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-10-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-10-3, If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-10-2 = No), the subroutine for ART preparation state processing is ended, and step S302 for conditional device command reception processing is performed. Move the processing to -3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-10-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-10-1. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-10-3 is finished, the subroutine of the ART preparation state process is finished, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to

(Process for ART state)
Next, based on FIG. 62, in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-1-2-1 in FIG. 51, the ART state process performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state Explain about FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-1-2-11-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not "1" or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-11). -2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake state game number counter for ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-4, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. Based on (B), a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11 A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-6. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11-6, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process in step S 302-3-1-2-1 11-4 as the sub RAM 403. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-6 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a first addition state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the first additional state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process of lottery whether or not to shift to the first additional state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 is determined to shift to the first added state as a result of the lottery by the first added state transition lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11. To determine the When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-9. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-9)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a first additional precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the first additional precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27C) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until transition to the first additional preparation state is determined, and the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-10)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the first additional precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the first additional precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control substrate 400 becomes the first additional precursor state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a second addition state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the second additional state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process of lottery whether to shift to the second addition state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-12)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-12, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 is determined to shift to the second added state as a result of the lottery by the second added state shift lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11. To determine the When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-13. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-13)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a second addition precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the second additional precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27D) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games before transitioning to the second addition preparation state is determined, and the value of the second addition precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-14)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the second additional precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the second additional precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control substrate 400 becomes the second additional precursor state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-15)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter for ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11 is finished, the subroutine for ART state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-16)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-1-1, A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is "1" or more. Then, if it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more (step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-11 = Yes), step S 302-3-1-1. The process proceeds to 2-1-11-17, and when it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not "1" or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11-16). = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-19.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-17)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “0”. When it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11-17 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If the process proceeds to 2-1-11-18 and it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-11-17) = No), the subroutine for the ART state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-18)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-11-18, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state fake game number lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information on the winning combination included in the condition device command and the ART state fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29B) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of fake state games for the ART state is determined, and the value of the counter for the number of ART state fake games provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-18 is finished, the subroutine for ART state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-19)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-11-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the fourth fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the fourth fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-11-11 is finished, the subroutine for ART state process is finished, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process. Migrate the process.

(Processing for the first additional precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 63, in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the state controlled by the sub control board 400 is performed when the first additional precursor state is (1) A description will be given of the processing for the addition precursor state. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first additional precursor state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-12-2.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-12-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-3, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table (additional precursor state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32C) Based on the reference), it is lottery processing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-12-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-12-5. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-12-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-12-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-12-5, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-12-3, the sub RAM 403 A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-12-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-2. As a result, processing is performed to determine whether the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter is "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-12-6 = Yes), step S302-3-3. If it is determined that the process proceeds to 1-2-1-12-7 and the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1 -12-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-12-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-7)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-12-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the first addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the first additional preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first additional preparation state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-12-7 is completed, the subroutine of the first additional precursor state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Move the processing to -2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-8)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-12-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-1, A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not “0” (step S 302-3-1-2-1-12-8 = No). And the first additional precursor state process subroutine is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-12-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the termination of the ART state because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” although it is decided to shift to the first additional state. For this purpose, processing is performed to copy the value of the first additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-12-12 is completed, the subroutine of the first additional precursor state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Move the processing to -2.

(Processing for the first additional preparation state)
Next, based on FIG. 64, in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-1-2 in FIG. 51, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first additional preparation state. 1) A description will be given of the processing for preparation for addition. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first additional preparation process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-13-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-13-1, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (preparing preparation state) (FIG. 32D) Based on the reference), it is lottery processing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-13-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-13-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-13-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-13-1. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-13-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-13-3. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S 302-3-1-2-1-13-2 = No), the subroutine for the first addition preparation state processing is ended, and the process for receiving the conditional device command is performed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-13-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-13-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the ART state game number increase lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-13-1, the sub RAM 403 A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-13-3 is completed, the subroutine of the first addition preparation state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Move the processing to -2.

(Processing for the first additional state)
Next, based on FIG. 65, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. A description will be given of the processing for the additional state. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first additional processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-14-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-14-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the first additional state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the first additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-14-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-14-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-14-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-14-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (first added state) (FIG. 32 (E ), Based on the drawing, a lottery process is performed to determine whether to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-14-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-14-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-14-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-14-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-14-2. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-14-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-14-4. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-14-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-14-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-14-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-14-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-14-2, as the sub RAM 403. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-14-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-14-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-14-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-14-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the first addition state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-14-1. As a result, processing is performed to determine whether or not the value of the first additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the first additional state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-14-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If it is determined that the process proceeds to -2-1-14-6 and the value of the first additional state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-14) -5 = No), the first addition state process subroutine is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-14-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-14-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the second fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the second fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-14-6 is completed, the subroutine of the first additional state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to 2.

(Process for second fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 66, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 2 The fall standby state process will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-15-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-15-1, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (second fall standby state) (FIG. G) Based on (G), a lottery process is performed to determine whether to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-15-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-15-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-15-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-15-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-15-1. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-15-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-15-3. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-15-2 = No), the subroutine of the second fall standby processing is ended, and the condition device command reception processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-15-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-15-3, the sub CPU 401 performs art state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the ART state game number increase lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-15-1, the sub RAM 403 A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-15-3 ends, the subroutine of the second fall standby state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process proceeds. Move the processing to -2.

(Processing for the second additional precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 67, in the state-by-state transition processing of step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. (2) A description will be given of the processing for the additional precursor state. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of second additional precursor state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-16-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for subtracting “1” from the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-16-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-3, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table (additional precursor state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32C) Based on the reference), it is lottery processing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-16-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-3. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-16-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-5. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-16-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-5)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-16-5, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-3 in the sub RAM 403. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-16-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-6)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-2. As a result, processing is performed to determine whether the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. When it is determined that the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-16-6 = Yes), step S302-3-3. If it is determined that the process proceeds to 1-2-1-16-7 and the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1 -16-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-16-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-7)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the second addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the second addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second addition preparation state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-16-17 is completed, the subroutine of the second additional precursor state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Move the processing to -2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-8)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts one from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-1, A process is performed to determine whether the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become "0". When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-16-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not “0” (step S 302-3-1-2-1-16-8 = No). And the second addition precursor state process subroutine is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-16-9)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-16-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the termination of the ART state because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” although it is decided to shift to the second addition state. For this purpose, processing is performed to copy the value of the second additional precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-16-16 is completed, the subroutine of the second additional precursor state process is completed, and step S302-3-1-2 of the process upon reception of the condition device command is performed. Move the processing to -2.

(Processing for the second additional preparation state)
Next, based on FIG. 68, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the second control is performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second addition preparation state. 2) A description will be given of the processing for preparation for addition. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second preparation process for additional state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-17-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-17-1, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (preparing preparation state) (FIG. 32D) Based on the reference), it is lottery processing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. And if the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-17-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-2-1-17-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-17-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-17-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-17-1. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-17-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-17-3. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-17-2 = No), the subroutine of the second addition preparation state processing is ended, and the process of the conditional device command reception is performed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-17-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-17-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the ART state game number addition lottery process of step S 302-3-1-2-17-17, the sub RAM 403. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-17-3 is completed, the subroutine of the second addition preparation state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Move the processing to -2.

(Processing for 2nd addition status)
Next, based on FIG. 69, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, a second state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second addition state A description will be given of the processing for the additional state. FIG. 69 is a view showing a subroutine of the processing for the second addition state.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-18-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-18-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the second additional state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the second additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-18-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-18-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-18-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-18-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (second added state) (FIG. 32 (F ), Based on the drawing, a lottery process is performed to determine whether to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-18-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-18-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-18-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-18-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-18-2. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-18-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-18-4. If it is determined that the game has not been won (step S302-3-1-2-1-18-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-18-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-18-4)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-18-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-18-2. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-18-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-18-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-18-5)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-18-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the value of the second addition state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S 302-3-1-2-1-18-1. As a result, processing is performed to determine whether the value of the second additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. When it is determined that the value of the second additional game state counter is "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-18-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1. If it is determined that the value of the second additional state game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-1-2-1-18) -5 = No), the subroutine for the second addition state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-18-6)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-18-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 sets the third fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-18-6 is completed, the subroutine of the second addition state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. Transfer the process to 2.

(Process for the third fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 70, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the third state is the third state performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third fall standby state. 3 A description will be given of the process for standby for falling. FIG. 70 is a view showing a subroutine of the third fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-19-1)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-19-1, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery processing for the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the information related to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the number of ART state games added lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (third fall standby state) (FIG. H) Based on (H), a lottery process is performed to determine whether to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-19-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-19-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-19-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-19-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may add the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number-added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-19-1. A process is performed to determine whether or not it has been determined. When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-19-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-19-3. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S 302-3-1-2-1-19-2 = No), the subroutine for the third fall standby processing is ended, and the condition device command reception processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-19-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-1-19-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery based on the number of ART state games added lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-19-1, as the sub RAM 403. A process of adding to the ART state game number counter provided in is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-19-3 ends, the subroutine of the third fall standby state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process proceeds. Move the processing to -2.

(Process for the fourth fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 71, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-2-1 of FIG. 51, the fourth state is the case where the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. 4 The drop standby state process will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the fourth fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-20-1)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth fall-off standby state withdrawal return lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 selects information relating to the winning combination included in the condition device command, and the fourth fall standby state withdrawal return lottery table (see FIG. 33B) provided in the sub ROM 402. On the basis of this, after the ART state has ended, a process of drawing whether or not to shift to the ART state again is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-20-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-20-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-20-2)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the ART state as a result of the lottery by the fourth fall-off standby state pullback lottery process of step S302-3-1-2-1-20-1. Perform processing to determine whether When it is determined that the player has won (step S302-3-1-2-1-20-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-20-3. If it is determined that the player has not won (step S302-3-1-2-1-20-2 = No), the subroutine of the fourth fall standby processing is ended, and the condition device command reception processing step The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-20-3)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-20-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-20-4.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-20-4)
In step S 302-3-1-2-1-20-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1-20-4 is finished, the subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process is finished, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process is completed. Move the processing to -2.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, the process at the time of display determination command reception performed by the process of step S302-3-1-4 in FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing upon reception of a display determination command.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1)
In step S 302-3-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs transition processing by state upon reception of a display determination command. Specifically, sub CPU 401 performs processing in accordance with the state managed by sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in sub RAM 403. Here, in the transition processing by state in step S302-3-1-4-1, a subroutine is provided according to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIGS. 73 to 80). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1 ends, the display determination command reception process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Process of preparation state of Bonus when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 73, when the status managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the state of “Bonus preparation” in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. A description will be given of the processing for preparation of the bonus state when the display determination command to be performed is received. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for preparation state for bonus when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-1)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a bonus replay has been displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols relating to “Bonus replay” is displayed on the activated line. Then, when it is determined that the Bonus replay is displayed (Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-1 = Yes), the processing is performed in Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-2. When it is determined that a transition is made and Bonus Replay is not displayed (Step S302-3-1-4-1-1 = No), the subroutine of the processing for the Bonus preparation state is ended when the display determination command is received. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether the first bonus is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the first Bonus is on standby based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the first bonus is waiting (step S302-3-1-4-1-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-1-3. If it is determined that the first bonus is not in progress (step S302-3-1-4-1-2 = No), step S302-3-1-4-1-5-5. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-3)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the first bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-4)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set “30” to the value of the first bonus game for number state game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the first bonus game for state number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second Bonus is on standby. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the second Bonus is in standby based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the second Bonus is on standby (step S302-3-1-4-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1- 1-6. If it is determined that the second bonus is not in progress (step S302-3-1-4-1-5 = No), step S302-3-1-4-1-8 is performed. Transfer the process to

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the second bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “40” to the value of the second bonus game for number state game. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the second number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to set the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the third bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the third bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-9-9.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-9)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-9-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus game for state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third number game for bonus state game provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-9-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-1-10)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-10 is completed, the subroutine of the process for preparation of the bonus state when the display determination command is received is ended, and the process of step S302-3-1-6 of the process of each command Transfer the process to

(Processing for the first fall standby state when the display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 74, in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. 72, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the first fall standby state. A description will be given of the processing for the first fall standby state when the display determination command is received, which is performed in the case. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine of first fall standby state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols relating to "blank" is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-2-2. If it is determined that a blank is not displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-2-1 = No), the subroutine of the first fall standby processing is completed when the display determination command is received Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-2-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to make the state managed by the sub control board 400 a normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-2-3)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-2-3 is finished, the subroutine of the first fall standby state processing at the time of the display determination command reception is finished, and the step S302-3-1 of the processing of each command. Move the processing to -6.

(Process for ART preparation state when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 75, when the state managed by sub control board 400 is in the state of ART preparation in the state command transition process at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. A description will be given of processing for ART preparation state at the time of reception of a display determination command to be performed. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART preparation state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols relating to “ART Replay” is displayed on the activated line. Then, when it is determined that the ART replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-3 = Yes), the process is performed in step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2. If it is determined that ART Replay is not displayed after transition (Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-1 = No), the subroutine of ART preparation state processing is ended when the display determination command is received. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for adding "50" to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3 is completed, the subroutine of the processing for preparation of ART for the state of display determination command reception is completed, and the process of step S302-3-1-6 by command is performed. Transfer the process to

(Processing for the first additional preparation state when the display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 76, in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. A description will be given of the processing for the first additional preparation state at the time of receiving the display determination command performed in the case. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of first addition state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to "RUSH replay" is displayed on the activated line. Then, if it is determined that RUSH replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2. When it is determined that RUSH replay has not been displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1 = No), the subroutine of the processing for the first addition preparation state when the display determination command is received Is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the first addition state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first additional state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first additional state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3)
In step S 302-3-1-1-4-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the first additional state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of setting “10” to the value of the first additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3 is finished, the subroutine of the process for first additional preparation state processing when the display determination command is received is finished, and the process of step S302-3-1 of the process according to command is performed. Move the processing to -6.

(Process for the second addition preparation state when receiving the display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 77, in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. 72, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the second addition preparation state. A description will be given of the processing for the second additional preparation state when the display determination command is received, which is performed in the case. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine of second addition preparation state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the special replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols related to “special replay” is displayed on the activated line. Then, when it is determined that the special replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1 = Yes), the process is performed in step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2. When it is determined that the special replay is not displayed (Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1 = No), the subroutine of the processing for the second additional preparation state when the display determination command is received. Is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to make the state managed by the sub control board 400 a second addition state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second superimposition state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control substrate 400 becomes the second superimposition state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “20” to the value of the second addition state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “20” to the value of the second additional state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3 is finished, the subroutine of the processing for second additional preparation state at the time of display determination command reception is finished, and step S302-3-1 of processing by command is performed. Move the processing to -6.

(Processing for the second fall standby state when the display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 78, in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. A description will be given of the processing for the second fall standby state when the display determination command is received, which is performed in the case. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a subroutine of second fall standby state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols relating to “ART Replay” is displayed on the activated line. Then, if it is determined that the ART replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2. When it is determined that ART Replay has not been displayed (Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1 = No), the subroutine of the processing for the second fall standby state when the display determination command is received Is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 as the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2 is finished, the subroutine of the second fall standby state processing at the time of display determination command reception is finished, and step S302-3-1 of the processing of each command. Move the processing to -6.

(Processing for the third fall standby state when the display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 79, in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. 72, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the third fall standby state. A description will be given of the processing for the third fall standby state when the display determination command is received, which is performed in the case. FIG. 79 is a view showing a subroutine of third fall standby state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols relating to “ART Replay” is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that the ART replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1 = Yes), the process is performed in step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2. When it is determined that ART Replay has not been displayed (Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1 = No), the subroutine of the processing for the third fall standby state when the display determination command is received Is ended, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2 ends, the subroutine of the second fall standby state processing at the time of the display determination command reception ends, and step S302-3-1 of the processing of each command. Move the processing to -6.

(Process for the fourth fall standby state when the display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 80, in the status command transition processing at the time of display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. 72, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the fourth fall standby state. A description will be given of the processing for the fourth fall standby state when the display determination command is received, which is performed in the case. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of fourth fall standby state processing when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not a combination of symbols relating to "blank" is displayed on the activated line. When it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2. If it is determined that a blank is not displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = No), the subroutine of the fourth fall standby processing is completed when the display determination command is received. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-based process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2)
In step S 302-3-1-4-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to make the state managed by the sub control board 400 a normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is in the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3)
In step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting "999" to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3 is completed, the subroutine of the processing for waiting for the fourth fall is terminated when the display determination command is received, and the process of step S302-3-1 for the processing of each command is completed. Move the processing to -6.

  When the sub CPU 401 determines that the symbol combination relating to the winning with the payout is displayed in the above-described processing for display determination command reception, the speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left) through the effect control board 600 Control is performed so that the payout sound is output from the section speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43). Note that the timing of emitting the dispensing sound is not limited to the display determination time, and for example, the dispensing process is performed in step S120 of FIG. 36, and the payout sound is output by detecting the payout of the medal. May be

  Further, as described above, the sub CPU 401 transmits an effect specifying command to the effect control board 600 when a predetermined effect is generated. When the sub CPU 401 receives a command indicating the specific detection result (error detection result or the like), the sub CPU 401 transmits an output designation command to the effect control board 600.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 receives the effect specifying command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines sound data to be output in the specified effect based on the effect specifying command. A process of outputting audio data from the sound source ROM 606 or the like to the respective speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier substrate 500 is performed. In addition, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600 receives the output designation command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits the output designation command to the sound source IC 605. The sound source IC 605 performs predetermined sound data based on the output designation command from the sound source ROM 606 or the like via the amplifier board 500 to the respective speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) Make it output.

  Furthermore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 pre-designated the sound data stored in the sound source ROM 606 to the respective speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). It is classified into audio data to be output to a channel and audio data to search for and output a predetermined channel from time to time.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines the channels of the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 as fixed channels specifying the specific audio data output destination. , At the time of output of audio data, it is classified into a variable channel for searching for a predetermined output destination. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets the channels for the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 as six fixed channels from 00CH to 05CH, and 34 variable channels from 06CH to 39CH. And

  As sound data for which a fixed channel is designated as an output destination, abnormality notification data for notifying an abnormality of the gaming machine 1, warning notification data for notifying a warning, operation sound data relating to operations essential for the progress of the game, etc. This applies to voices that must be prioritized. As these audio data, for example, when the setting change device operates abnormally, audio data such as door opening, BET sound, etc. correspond. That is, the above-mentioned system sound corresponds to the sound output from the fixed channel. Further, as sound data for the variable channel, an effect sound or the like for an effect to be performed for each game is set, and for example, BGM in the game, an effect button operation sound or the like is set.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 601 processes each of the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) according to the output specification of the speakers and the status of the vacant channel. The processing for each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) is the same processing, so the details of the processing for each speaker will be described. I omit it.

(Main processing in effect control board)
Next, main processing in the effect control board 600 will be described based on FIG.

(Step S401)
In step S401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs initialization processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing such as an error check on the liquid crystal control RAM 603. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 also performs initialization (clearing) processing of the storage area of the output target empty channel, the output stop target channel, and the output stopped channel in the channel information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S401 ends, the process proceeds to step S402.

(Step S402)
In step S402, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs sound reproduction control processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 analyzes a command transmitted from the sub control substrate 400, and performs a sound reproduction process and the like. And if the process of step S402 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S403.

(Step S403)
In step S403, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs effect control execution processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 controls the effect device sensor (upper left effect device sensor 652s, lower left effect device sensor 653s, upper right effect device sensor) via the command transmitted from the sub control board 400 or the effect device drive board 650. Liquid crystal display based on signals received from 655s, lower right effect device sensor 656s, liquid crystal lift sensor (upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s, lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s, upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s, lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s) Display processing of the effect image for the device 46, effect device motor (left effect device motor 651, right effect device motor 654) through the effect device drive substrate 650, liquid crystal lift motor (left liquid crystal lift motor 657, right liquid crystal lift motor 660 ), Drive control processing of the rendering device 50, the rendering device drive relay base Performing lamp control processing and the like via 750. Then, when the process of step S403 ends, the main process in the effect control board 600 ends.

(Sound playback control process)
Next, the sound reproduction control process performed by the process of step S402 in FIG. 81 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of sound reproduction control processing.

(Step S402-1)
In step S402-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs system sound determination processing. In the process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of determining whether an output designation command has been received. When receiving the output designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 updates the information of the fixed channel to be used based on the output designation command, and outputs the output designation command to a desired device such as the sound source IC 605 or VDP 607. Do the processing. Then, when the process of step S402-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-2.

(Step S402-2)
In step S402-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not an effect designation command has been received. In the processing, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 400, and performs processing to determine whether or not an effect designation command has been received. When it is determined that the effect specifying command has been received (step S402-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-3, and when it is determined that the effect specifying command has not been received (step S402) -2 = No), the sound reproduction control process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S403 of the main process in the effect control board 600.

(Step S402-3)
In step S402-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines audio data to be output based on the rendering designation command (hereinafter referred to as audio output for presentation output), and audio data having the same sound number as the audio data for presentation output determined is reproduced. It is determined whether or not it is medium. That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether sound data identical to the effect output sound data is currently being reproduced. When it is determined that audio data of the same sound number is being reproduced (step S402-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-4, and audio data of the same sound number is not being reproduced. If it is determined that (step S402-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S402-5.

(Step S402-4)
In step S402-4, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs reproduction sound stop processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of stopping the output from the channel during reproduction of the audio data of the same sound number as the effect output audio data searched in the process of step S402-3. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores the channel number at which the reproduction output of the audio data is stopped in the storage area of the channel in the output stop state in the channel information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Then, when the process of step S402-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-9.

(Step S402-5)
In step S402-5, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs free channel search processing. The free channel search process will be described later. In the process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a free channel by a search method described later, and stores the found free channel in the storage area of the output target free channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. And if the process of step S402-5 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S402-6.

(Step S402-6)
In step S402-6, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether there is an idle channel. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not the information of the empty channel is stored in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is a vacant channel if the vacant channel information is stored in the storage area of the vacant output channel, and the vacant channel information must be stored in the vacant channel storage target area. It is determined that there is no free channel. Then, when it is determined that there is an empty channel (step S402-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-9, and when it is determined that there is no empty channel (step S402-6 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S402-7.

(Step S402-7)
In step S402-7, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs stop channel search processing. The stop channel search process will be described later. In the process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a stop channel by a search method described later, and stores the found stop channel in the storage area of the output stop target channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. When the process of step S402-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-8.

(Step S402-8)
In step S402-8, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs reproduction sound stop processing. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs audio data being reproduced from the stop channel searched in the process of step S402-7, that is, the channel stored in the storage area of the output stop target channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Perform processing to stop the output of The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores the channel number at which the reproduction output of the audio data is stopped in the storage area of the channel in the output stop state in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. And if the process of step S402-8 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S402-9.

(Step S402-9)
In step S402-9, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs channel setting processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of setting a channel for outputting audio data to be output this time. Then, when the process of step S402-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S402-10.

(Step S402-10)
In step S402-10, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs sound reproduction execution processing. In the process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of reproducing and outputting audio data scheduled to be output this time for the set channel. Then, when the process of step S402-10 ends, the sound reproduction control process ends, and the process proceeds to step S403 of the main process of the effect control board 600.

(Free channel search process)
Here, the free channel search process will be described.

  In the free channel search process, first, it is determined whether an output channel of audio data requested to be output is designated in advance. That is, it is determined whether the designated audio data is audio data for a fixed channel or audio data for a variable channel.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the designated audio data is audio data for a fixed channel, the unique channel number to which the designated audio data is to be output is set as a vacant channel, and this channel number is set. And stores the output target free channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603.

When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the designated audio data is audio data for a variable channel, it searches whether or not there are vacant channels in the variable channels, that is, 06CH to 39CH.
The free channel search method of the variable channel is roughly classified into whether the audio data to be output is stereo audio data or monaural audio data.

  When the audio data to be output is stereo audio data, it is searched from the upper channel whether two channels are vacant continuously from the even channel number.

  That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 first determines whether 06CH and 07CH are free. If the 06CH and 07CH are not free, then the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether the 08CH and 09CH are free.

  If the 08CH and 09CH are not vacant, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 similarly searches in the lower direction until a vacant is found. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not 38CH and 39CH are free, and determines that there is no free channel if free. When a vacant channel is found in the middle of the search, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is a vacant channel, and stores the searched channel number in the storage area of the output target vacant channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603.

  On the other hand, when the audio data to be output is monaural audio data, one of the two channels of even channel number and the next odd channel number is in use and the other is vacant. Search if there is.

  Then, if there is no free channel not paired, free channel search is performed from the lower channel. That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for free channels from 39 CH to 38 CH, 37 CH,... 06 CH in the upper direction. In addition, since it is known that there is no free channel in the pair, only odd channels may be searched. When a vacant channel is found by this search, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that there is a vacant channel, and stores the searched channel number in the storage area of the output target vacant channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603.

(Stop channel search process)
Next, the stop channel search process will be described.
In the stop channel search process, when a channel for outputting new audio data is not available, a part of the audio data currently being output is stopped to release the output channel. Is a process for searching for a channel for stopping audio data of Also, there are several methods for stopping channel search processing as shown below.

  First, in the stop channel search process, the stop channel is searched based on the priority of the output of the audio data.

  In the stop channel search process based on the priority order, the priority order of audio data scheduled to be output this time is included in the search condition to search for the stop channel. When the priority of voice data to be output this time is included in the search condition, depending on the priority of voice data to be output this time and the priority of voice data being output, there is no stop channel corresponding to the search condition. In some cases, audio data to be output may not be output.

  On the other hand, it is also possible to search for the stop channel without including the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time in the search condition. If the priority of the audio data to be output this time is not included in the search condition, any channel that is outputting the audio data can be searched as a stop channel, and the audio data to be output this time is output from the searched channel. be able to.

  In addition, when the priority of voice data to be output this time is included in the search condition in the search process of the stop channel based on the priority, the priority of the voice data having the same priority as the voice data to be output this time is the search target It may or may not be included.

  If the same priority as the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is not included in the search target, the priority of the audio data being output is higher than the priority of the audio data currently scheduled to be output It excludes from, and searches only from those lower than the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time. Therefore, when there is no voice data whose priority is lower than the priority of the voice data to be output this time in the voice data being output, there is no stop channel corresponding to the search condition, and the voice data to be output this time is output I will not let you.

  On the other hand, when the same priority as the priority of the audio data to be output this time is included in the search target, the priority of the audio data being output is higher than the priority of the audio data to be output this time It excludes from the search target and searches only from the ones below the priority of the audio data scheduled to be output this time. In this case, when there is only voice data having a higher priority than the priority of the voice data to be output this time in the voice data being output, there is no stop channel corresponding to the search condition, and the voice data to be output this time is selected. Do not output.

  Next, a method of determining the stop channel in the case where the priority order of the audio data to be searched is the same will be described. In the present embodiment, when the priority order is the same, the following two examples will be described as the method of determining the stop channel.

  Here, as a method of determining the first stop channel, it is assumed that a channel having a short remaining reproduction time of audio data being output is determined as a stop channel from the channel being output. Further, as a method of determining the second stop channel, a method of determining an older one in the order of starting output of audio data being output from the channel being output as the stop channel.

  In addition, as a method of determining the stop channel, it is possible to determine one having a long remaining reproduction time of audio data being output as a stop channel from a channel being output or a new one in the order of starting output of audio data being output. It may be determined from the channel in output as the stop channel, or the one in which the total reproduction time of the audio data in output is short may be determined from the channel in output as the stop channel.

  In addition, as a method of determining the stop channel, when it is determined from the channel being output that has a short remaining reproduction time of the audio data being output as the stop channel, the reproduction time of the audio data scheduled to be output this time is compared It is also good. That is, when the remaining reproduction time of the retrieved audio data being output is longer than the reproduction time of the audio data scheduled to be output this time, the channel in the output of the retrieved audio data is excluded from the target of the stop channel. May be

(Channel setting process)
Next, a channel setting process performed by the process of step S402-9 in FIG. 82 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine of channel setting processing.

(Step S402-9-1)
In step S402-9-1, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether there is a stopped channel. That is, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether or not a predetermined channel is stored in the storage area of the channel in the output stop state in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603. When it is determined that there is a stopped channel (step S402-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S402-9-2, and when it is determined that there is no stopped channel ( Step S402-9-1 = No) The process proceeds to step S402-9-3.

(Step S402-9-2)
In step S402-9-2, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs stop channel setting processing. In the processing, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs processing for setting the channel stored in the storage area of the in-stop channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 as a channel for reproducing and outputting audio data scheduled to be output this time. When the process of step S402-9-2 ends, the channel setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S402-10 of the sound reproduction control process.

(Step S402-9-3)
In step S402-9-3, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs an idle channel setting process. In the process, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a process of setting a channel stored in the storage area of the output target empty channel in the channel information area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 as a channel for reproducing and outputting audio data scheduled to be output this time. Then, when the process of step S402-9-3 ends, the channel setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S402-10 of the sound reproduction control process.

  Note that, with respect to the main processing in the effect control board 600, a liquid crystal control interrupt process (not shown) occurs at a predetermined interval. In the liquid crystal control interrupt process, the remaining reproduction time of each channel in the channel state management map in the channel information storage area of the liquid crystal control RAM 603 is updated.

  Next, the timing charts of FIGS. 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 93, 94, 95, 96 and the animations of FIGS. 89, 91, and 92. The present invention will be described with reference to the volume graph of FIG.

(Word explanation of timing chart)
First, terms used in the timing chart will be described. First, “music A” is, for example, BGM output from the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) based on the music data stored in the sound source ROM 606 (Background music) corresponds. The sound source ROM 606 may store, besides the music data corresponding to the “music A”, music data corresponding to the “music B”, music data corresponding to the “music C”, and the like.

  Next, "mute" indicates that the music is output (ON) but no sound is output, and if "mute" is ON, "sound" described later is muttered Become. On the other hand, when "mute" is off, the "sound" described later is output.

  Next, "sound" represents sound based on "music A", and when "mute" described above is OFF, "sound" based on "music A" is in the sound output state If the "mute" is ON, the "sound" based on the "music A" is muted. In addition, it is constituted so that it may be made to sound gradually when making "sound" from sound muting state into sound emitting state, and when making "sound" from sound outputting state into sound muting state, it will be muted gradually. Since it is configured, in FIGS. 84 to 88, a part of the curve is shown.

  Next, “successful sound” is sound that is determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player, and is output when the determination result is notified to the player. The state advantageous to the player corresponds to a bonus game such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, a special game such as an RT game state, an ART state or an AT state, or an additional provision game of the number of ART states.

  Next, “BET sound” is a sound emitted to notify the player that a medal has been inserted based on the insertion of a medal necessary for the game. In addition, the insertion of the medal necessary for the game may be performed under the condition that the predetermined number of medals are stored, the BET button 7 or the MAX BET button 8 is operated, or the predetermined number of medals is not stored. It is performed by inserting a medal from the medal insertion slot 6. The number of medals required for the game is three per game, but may be two per game or one per game.

  Next, the “reel rotation start sound” is a reel (left reel 18, middle reel 19) based on the fact that the player operates the start lever 10 in a situation where medals necessary for the game are inserted. , Right reel 20) is a sound emitted to notify the player that the rotation has been started.

  Next, the “stopping sound” is a sound emitted to notify the player of the stop of the reel based on the fact that the stop button has been operated by the player. Specifically, the left stop button 11 corresponding to the left reel 18 is operated to stop the left reel 18, and the middle stop button 12 corresponding to the middle reel 19 is operated to stop the middle reel 19. When the right stop button 13 corresponding to the right reel 20 is operated and the right reel 20 is stopped, a sound is output respectively. Therefore, in FIGS. 84 to 88, three stop sounds corresponding to the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are output.

  Next, "disbursement sound" is a sound that is emitted in synchronization with the payout of medals being performed after the symbol combination accompanied by the payout is stopped on the effective line. In addition, it is a sound emitted to notify the player that there is a payout. For example, when the symbol combination of "BELL A", "BELL A" and "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line, nine payouts are made, and a payout sound consisting of payout times described later It is emitted.

  Next, “a sound for prompting the operation of the effect button” is a sound output when the operation of the effect button 21 in the operation receiving state is urged. For example, at the timing after all the stop buttons have been operated in one game, the player can output a sound such as "Press!" Along with the effect button image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 to the player. I am trying to prompt the operation. The effect button 21 is not always in the operation accepting state, but changes from the operation non accepting state to the operation accepting state, and changes from the operation accepting state to the operation non accepting state.

  Next, the “failure sound” is a sound emitted when the determination result is notified to the player when it is not determined to shift to a state advantageous to the player. The state advantageous to the player corresponds to a bonus game such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, a special game such as an RT game state, an ART state or an AT state, or an additional provision game of the number of ART states.

  Note that the “sound” is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and, for example, the start lever 10 is operated based on the fact that the player operates the start lever 10 in a situation where medals necessary for the game are inserted. The player operates the start lever 10 under the condition that the lever sound is emitted to notify the player that the player has been operated or the medals necessary for the game have been inserted. When the rotation start condition is not satisfied (when the so-called wait time has not elapsed), a sound is output to notify the player that the rotation start condition of the reel is not satisfied (being in the wait state) A "weight sound" etc. can also be included in the "sound" mentioned above.

  Next, “Song B” means, similarly to “Song A” described above, speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, for example, based on music data stored in sound source ROM 606). , BGM output from the lower right speaker 43). Note that "music A" and "music B" are composed of different music.

  The “sound” in FIG. 88 corresponds to the “music A” and the “music B”. That is, when "Song A" is ON, "Sound" based on "Song A" is emitted, and when "Song B" is ON, "Sound" based on "Song B" Will be output.

(Detailed explanation of the timing chart)
In addition, in FIGS. 84 to 88, for example, it is assumed that the user is staying in the chance zone to which the transition is made with a predetermined probability when the watermelon of the winning number "25" or the weak cherry of the winning number "26" is won. ing. In this chance zone, a lottery is made to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus preparation state) at a transition probability (for example, a lottery probability based on FIG. 25C) according to the winning combination. After the medal is bet and the start lever 10 is operated (after the game is started), the game is over until the lottery result to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus preparation state) is derived (the game ends) Up to). In addition, derivation | leading-out of a lottery result is derived | led-out when the production button 21 is operated. In the chance zone, a transition lottery to the bonus preparation state is performed with a lottery probability based on FIG. 25C, but in a state advantageous to the player (for example, the bonus preparation state) in all the winning combinations. A lottery may be made to shift, or a lottery may be made to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus preparation state) only when a specific combination (for example, a bell combination or a replay combination) is established. . The chance zone corresponds to the aforementioned "chance state" (see FIG. 22). In the chance zone, the operation of the effect button 21 is not necessarily provided, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to the player at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the third stop operation is performed. The configuration may be such that a success or failure sound is output based on the determination result. Moreover, although the operation of the effect button 21 is provided, if the player does not operate the effect button 21 within the operation effective period, a success or failure sound is automatically emitted after the operation effective period has elapsed. It may be a configuration.

  Further, the chance zone is composed of a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and in FIG. 85, other than the final game of the chance zone (for example, the first game to the ninth game) is shown. Represents the final game (for example, the tenth game) in the chance zone. In addition, in FIG. 84 to FIG. 86, the configuration is such that the mute state is established by muting, and in FIG. 87 the configuration is such that the mute state is established by temporarily stopping. Further, in FIG. 88, after “music A” is stopped and put into the mute state, “music B” is output. Note that "music A" or "music B" is a music output in the chance zone.

(Timing chart 1 of FIG. 84)
First, at timing (A) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 84, a BET sound is produced by the player operating the BET button 7 or the MAX BET button 8. Also, at timing (A), the music A is turned ON. Further, at timing (A), a sound is output. That is, when the BET button 7 or the MAX BET button 8 as the game start operation is performed, the sound based on the music A is output.

  Next, at timing (B), the BET sound is muted. That is, when the bet button 7 or the max bet button 8 which is the game start operation is performed, the bet sound and the sound based on the music A are output, but the bet sound is that the medal is bet. After notifying that, it becomes silent immediately.

  Next, at timing (C), based on the player operating the start lever 10, the rotation of the reel is started, and a reel rotation start sound is emitted. Then, after the reel rotation start sound is output, at timing (D), the reel rotation start sound is muted. That is, the reel rotation start sound is immediately muted after notification that the rotation of the reel has started.

  Next, at timing (E), the stop button is operated by the player, and the stop sound is produced by stopping the reel. Then, after the stop sound is output, the stop sound is muted at timing (F). That is, the stop sound immediately becomes muted after notifying that the stop button has been operated. For the sake of convenience, it is assumed that the stop button is operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Therefore, the stop sound emitted at timing (E) and muffled at timing (F) corresponds to the stop sound of the left reel 18 which is stopped by operating the left stop button 11.

  Next, at timing (G), the stop button is operated by the player, and the stop sound is produced as the reel is stopped. Then, after the stop sound is output, the stop sound is muted at timing (H). That is, the stop sound immediately becomes muted after notifying that the stop button has been operated. The stop sound emitted at timing (G) and muffled at timing (H) corresponds to the stop sound of the middle reel 19 that is stopped by operating the middle stop button 12.

  Next, at timing (I), the stop button is operated by the player, and the stop sound is produced by stopping the reel. Then, after the stop sound is output, the stop sound is muted at timing (J). That is, the stop sound immediately becomes muted after notifying that the stop button has been operated. The stop sound emitted at timing (I) and muffled at timing (J) corresponds to the stop sound of the right reel 20 which is stopped by operating the right stop button 13.

  Next, at timing (K), a payout sound is output based on the fact that the symbol combination accompanied by the payout has stopped on the effective line. In the example in FIG. 84, it is assumed that “pushing order bell A1” of the winning number “32” is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, the symbol combination of the left "bell A", the middle "bell A", and the right "bell A" constituting the "push order bell A1" is stopped on the effective line. Then, after the payout sound is output, the payout sound is muted at timing (L). In addition, it is comprised so that the sound based on the music A may be made into a mute state gradually from the timing (J) when the 3rd stop operation was performed, to the timing (L) which makes a payout sound mute.

  Next, at timing (L), the payout sound is put into a mute state, and the mute is turned ON, and the sound based on the music piece A is put into a mute state. In addition, a sound is generated to urge the operation of the effect button (effect button 21). For example, a sound such as “press!” Corresponds to the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button. Then, after the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is output, at timing (M), the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is silenced. That is, the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is immediately muted after the notification for urging the operation of the effect button is performed.

  Although not illustrated, at timing (L), the effect button 21 changes from the operation non-accepting state to the operation accepting state. When in the operation accepting state, the operation of the effect button 21 is accepted. Then, when the effect button 21 is operated while in this operation accepting state, in the example of FIG. 84, a lottery result (hit) for transitioning to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state) is made. It is supposed to be informed. The operation acceptance state is configured from a predetermined time, and the time when it is in the operation acceptance state corresponds to the operation valid period in the present invention.

  In the case of a hit, since the state shifts from the chance zone to, for example, the Bonus preparation state, the music piece A turned on in the chance zone is turned off. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. The first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) in FIG. 84 to timing (L). The first period may be from the timing (A) in FIG. 84 to the timing (J) before the noise reduction state is gradually set.

  Then, at timing (N), by outputting a success sound, notification of transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state) will be made. Then, the sound output of the music A is turned off, and the mute is also turned off. Then, at timing (O), the success sound is silenced.

  As described above, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N), which is the second period, by turning on mute, the sound based on the music that has been output until then is put into the mute state. By changing the sound output condition in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has come. , You can clarify the points of interest.

  In the description of FIG. 84 above, the pachislot machine has been described as an example, but the same thing as the description of FIG. 84 above can be applied even during reach in a pachinko machine. For example, in a pachinko machine provided with an effect such as notifying whether it is a hit or a loss by pressing the effect button after developing into the super reach, mute before the effect button pressing timing. Put in the mute state. According to this structure, the same effect as that of the pachislot machine can be obtained.

(Timing chart 2 of FIG. 85)
Next, description will be made using timing chart 2 of FIG. Since FIG. 85 is another example of FIG. 84, in FIG. 85, the description of the same portions as FIG. 84 will be omitted, and only differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 85, a lottery result (missing) not to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, an ART state) is notified. When the game is out of the game, if there is the remaining game number in the chance zone, the process shifts to the next game in the chance zone, so the song A which is turned ON in the chance zone is kept ON.

  That is, at timing (N), by outputting a failure sound, it is notified that the player is not shifted to the advantageous state (for example, the ART state). Then, with the sound output of the music A remaining ON, the mute is turned OFF. Then, at timing (O), the failure sound is silenced to shift to the next game in the chance zone. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. The first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) in FIG. 85 to timing (L). The first period may be from the timing (A) in FIG. 85 to the timing (J) before the noise reduction state is gradually set.

  As described above, as in FIG. 84, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N) which is the second period, by turning on mute, the sound based on the music that has been emitted up to that point is muted . By changing the sound output condition in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has come. , You can clarify the points of interest.

(Timing chart 3 in FIG. 86)
Next, description will be made using timing chart 3 of FIG. Since FIG. 86 is another example of FIG. 84, in FIG. 86, the description of the same portions as FIG. 84 will be omitted, and only differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 86, a lottery result (off) not to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state) is notified. Since FIG. 86 shows the final game of the chance zone, since the chance zone ends in the game in which the release has been notified, the music piece A turned on in the chance zone is turned off.

  That is, at timing (N), by outputting a failure sound, it is notified that the player is not shifted to the advantageous state (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is turned off, and the mute is turned off. Then, at timing (O), the chance zone ends, with the failure sound muted. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. The first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) in FIG. 86 to timing (L). The first period may be from the timing (A) in FIG. 86 to the timing (J) before the noise reduction state is gradually set.

  As described above, as in FIGS. 84 and 85, during the second period, that is, from the timing (L) to the timing (N), muting is turned on to mute the sound based on the music that has been output until then. It was in the state. By changing the sound output condition in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has come. , You can clarify the points of interest.

(Timing chart 4 in Figure 87)
Next, description will be made using timing chart 4 of FIG. Since FIG. 87 is another example of FIG. 84, in FIG. 87 the description of the same portions as FIG. 84 will be omitted, and only differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 87, a lottery result (missing) not to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, an ART state) is notified. If the game is out of the game, if there is a remaining game number in the chance zone, the game is shifted to the next game in the chance zone, so the song A which is turned on in the chance zone is turned on again, temporarily Play again from the point where it was stopped.

  That is, at timing (N), by outputting a failure sound, it is notified that the player is not shifted to the advantageous state (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music A is turned on again. Then, at timing (O), the failure sound is silenced to shift to the next game in the chance zone. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. The first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) in FIG. 87 to timing (L). The first period may be from the timing (A) in FIG. 87 to the timing (J) before the noise reduction state is gradually set.

  From the above, as in FIG. 84, FIG. 85 and FIG. 86, in the period from timing (L) which is the second period to timing (N), by temporarily stopping the music, The sound based on this was muted. By changing the sound output condition in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has come. , You can clarify the points of interest.

(Timing chart 5 in FIG. 88)
Next, description will be made using the timing chart 5 of FIG. Since FIG. 88 is another example of FIG. 84, in FIG. 88, the description of the same portions as FIG. 84 will be omitted, and only differences from FIG. 84 will be described.

  In the example of FIG. 88, a lottery result (missing) not to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the ART state) is notified. In the example of FIG. 88, the music output for each game is different. That is, in the game in which the song A is turned on, in the case where the game is out, the song B different from the song A is output in the next game in the chance zone.

  That is, at timing (N), by outputting a failure sound, it is notified that the player is not shifted to the advantageous state (for example, the ART state). Then, the sound output of the music B is turned on. Then, at timing (O), the failure sound is silenced to shift to the next game in the chance zone. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (N) in FIG. The first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) in FIG. 88 to timing (L). The first period may be from the timing (A) in FIG. 88 to the timing (J) before the noise reduction state is gradually set.

  From the above, as in FIG. 84, FIG. 85, FIG. 86, and FIG. 87, in the period from the timing (L) to the timing (N) which is the second period, the music is sounded by stopping the music The sound based on is muted. By changing the sound output condition in this way, it is possible to notify that the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous for the player set after the timing (L) has come. , You can clarify the points of interest.

(Animation in FIG. 89)
Next, animation effects based on the timing charts of FIGS. 84, 85, 86, 87, and 88 will be described based on FIG. The animation effect shown in FIG. 89 is an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  First, in FIG. 89 (A), the ally character image and the enemy character image are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, and a state in which both characters face each other is shown. FIG. 89A is displayed from timing (C) to timing (L) in FIGS.

  Next, in FIG. 89 (B), the liquid crystal display device 46 displays an image prompting the player to operate the effect button 21. FIG. 89 (B) is displayed from timing (L) to timing (M) in FIGS.

  Next, in FIG. 89C, an image in which the teammate character has won is displayed. FIG. 89C is displayed from timing (N) to timing (O) in FIG. That is, when the lottery result is to shift to a state advantageous to the player, the liquid crystal display device 46 displays an image in which the teammate character has won, together with the sound of the success sound.

  Next, in FIG. 89D, an image in which the ally character has lost is displayed. 89D is displayed from timing (N) to timing (O) in FIGS. 85 to 88. That is, in the case of a lottery result not to shift to a state advantageous to the player, the liquid crystal display device 46 displays an image in which the ally character is defeated together with the sound of the failure sound.

(Timing chart 6 in FIG. 90)
Next, description will be made using the timing chart 6 of FIG. Note that although "music A" in FIG. 90 is the same as the contents described in the description of FIGS. 84 to 88, the description is omitted, but as a method for turning "music A" off, the previous FIG. The methods such as mute and pause described in FIG. 88 can be applied. The "success sound" is a sound output when the game in the freeze state described later continues and the number of games is increased, and the "failure sound" is the game in the freeze state described later Is the non-continuing sound that is output when the game number is not added. “Start sw” indicates the detection of the operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10 sw. That is, when “start sw” is ON, it indicates that the start lever 10 has been operated, and when “start sw” is OFF, the start lever 10 is operated. Indicates that it has not detected that. Note that, instead of the “start sw”, for example, the MAX BET switch 8 sw may detect that the MAX BET button 8 has been operated.

  Also, in FIG. 90, “A melody”, “B melody” and “Sabi” are elements constituting music A, and for example, when in “A melody”, the “A melody” portion of music A is reproduced. When in the "B Melo", the "B Melo" portion of the music A is reproduced, and when in the "Sabi", the "Sabi" portion of the Music A is reproduced. In addition, the music A is comprised in order of "A merlo", "B merlo", and "sabi", and "B merro" is comprised as a part connected with "sabi". Also, “Sabi” corresponds to the most exciting part of the music A. Note that in FIG. 90, the portions "A melody" and "B melody" of music A constitute a normal reproduction portion in the present invention, and the "sabi" portion of music A is a specific reproduction in the present invention. Make up the part.

  Note that in FIG. 90, unlike in FIGS. 84 to 88, it is assumed that the user is staying in the freeze state, and during the freeze state, the effect of adding the number of ART game games is performed. It is done. In the freeze state, it is possible to play a game (simulation game) a plurality of times only when the continuation rate configured with the predetermined probability is won. In this case, as the number of games played is increased, the number of ART games played is increased. Therefore, whether the game is continued or not is highly interesting to the player. In FIG. 90, in the case of continuation, it is notified that the game is continued by reproducing the chorus portion of the music, and in the case of non-continuation, the chorus portion of the music is not reproduced. , To notify that the game has been discontinued. That is, in FIG. 90, the advantageous game advantageous to the player corresponds to the game (simulated game) played during the freeze state, and it is advantageous for the player to win the continuous lottery of this game (simulated game). It corresponds to transitioning to a bonus game, and not being won in the continuous lottery of the game (simulated game) corresponds to not transitioning to a bonus game advantageous to the player.

  First, at timing (A) in FIG. 90 (a), the music piece A is turned ON, and the reproduction of the A melody portion constituting the music piece A is started. Note that the reproduction of the A melody part is performed over a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time passes, the reproduction of the B melody part is started.

  Next, at timing (B) in FIG. 90 (a), the music piece A is turned off and the reproduction of the B melody part is stopped. Then, after that, a notification for urging the operation of the start lever 10 is performed using, for example, the liquid crystal display device 46 (FIG. 91 (C) described later).

  Next, at timing (C) in FIG. 90 (a), the player operates the start lever 10 to turn on the start sw. Then, at timing (D) in FIG. 90 (a), the start sw is turned off and the music piece A is turned on to reproduce the chorus portion. Also, at timing (D) in FIG. 90 (a), the success sound is turned ON separately from the music A, and it is informed that the number of games will be added with continuation of the game in the freeze state. Configured. The success sound is turned off at timing (E) in FIG. 90 (a). Note that timing (D) in FIG. 90 (a) constitutes the specific timing in the unit game of the present invention. In addition, the reproduction of the B melody part of the music A may be performed up to the timing (D) which is the specific timing, or as shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction is performed before the timing (D) which is the specific timing. You may However, as shown in FIG. 90, when the reproduction is performed before the timing (D) which is the specific timing, the reproduction end time point of the B melody part (timing (B)) and the specific timing (timing (D) In consideration of the connection between the B melody portion and the rust portion, it is preferable that the distance between them and B) be as short as possible, and about 2 to 3 seconds are assumed.

  That is, in the freeze state, until it is time to notify whether the game (simulation game) is to be continued or not, the A melody part and the B melody part connected to the chorus part are to be reproduced, When it comes to the timing to notify whether the game will be continued or not, if the game is continued, the chorus part connected from the B melody part is reproduced. Therefore, since the continuation of the game during the freeze effect can be notified by the reproduction of the most exciting chorus part of the music, it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the effect. When the first game is continued, another song may be output in the second game.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 90 (b), at timing (A), the music piece A is turned ON, and the reproduction of the A melody portion constituting the music piece A is started. Note that the reproduction of the A melody part is performed over a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time passes, the reproduction of the B melody part is started.

  Next, at timing (B) in FIG. 90 (b), the music piece A is turned off, and the reproduction of the B melody part is stopped. Then, after that, a notification for urging the operation of the start lever 10 is performed using, for example, the liquid crystal display device 46 (FIG. 91 (C) described later).

  Next, at timing (C) in FIG. 90 (b), the player operates the start lever 10 to turn on the start sw. Then, at timing (D) in FIG. 90 (b), the start sw is turned off, and the chorus portion is not reproduced while the music A is turned off. Further, at timing (D) in FIG. 90 (b), the failure sound is turned ON to notify that the game is not continued during the freeze state. In addition, a failure sound is turned off at the timing (E) in FIG. 90 (b).

  That is, when the game is not continued, by not reproducing the climax part, it is possible to give higher value to the reproduction of the climax part performed when the game is continued.

  In the description of FIG. 90 described above, the pachi-slot is described as an example, but the same thing as the description of FIG. 90 above can be applied even during reach in a pachinko machine. For example, in a pachinko machine provided with an effect such as notifying whether it is a hit or a loss by pressing an effect button after developing into a super reach, if it is a hit, the chorus portion is reproduced Then, if it is a loss, it will not play the rust part. According to this structure, the same effect as that of the pachislot machine can be obtained.

(Animation in FIG. 91)
Next, based on FIG. 91, animation presentation based on the timing chart of FIG. 90 will be described. The animation effect shown in FIG. 91 indicates an effect to be performed using the liquid crystal display device 46 and reels (left reel 18, middle reel 19 and right reel 20).

  In addition, since FIG. 91 is a drawing showing a simulated game in a freeze state, the “stop display” used in the description of FIG. 91 is not a state in which the symbol is completely stop displayed, but a fluctuation fluctuation display It refers to the state of being. Incidentally, in FIG. 91, when the start lever 10 is operated (“play start operation” in FIG. 91), the state shifts to the freeze state, and thereafter, it reaches FIG. 91 (A). 91 (A), (B), (C) and (D) show that the game is in the freeze state (simulated game), and FIG. 91 (E) is the game in the freeze state ( It indicates that the simulated game has ended. That is, after reaching FIG. 91 (E), the game based on the above-mentioned “game start operation” is started. That is, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 start to move. On the other hand, as long as the game in the freeze state (simulated game) is continued, it does not reach FIG. 91 (E), and is shown in FIGS. 91 (A), (B), (C), (D). A game (simulation game) will be repeatedly executed.

  First, in FIG. 91 (A), the left reel 18 is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the left reel 18, the "replay A" symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper left reel, the "blue seven" symbol is stopped and displayed on the left reel middle, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower left reel. ing. The reel may be stopped either automatically or manually. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 46, “+10” indicating that the ART game has been added by 10 games is displayed, and a state in which the ally character is dominant is displayed. That is, 10 games are added based on the left reel 18 being stopped and displayed. The middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are in motion. Further, FIG. 91A corresponds to timing (A) to timing (B) of the timing chart in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 91 (B), the right reel 20 is stopped and displayed following the left reel 18. At this time, in the right reel 20, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper right reel, the "blue seven" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle right reel, and the "bell B" symbol is stopped and displayed on the lower right reel. There is. That is, in this state, the "blue seven" symbol on the left reel middle and the "blue seven" symbol on the right reel middle are stopped and displayed, and whether the "blue seven" symbol is stopped displayed on the middle reel middle or not. The state of kanji (the blue seven symbol hearing state) is being constructed. The reel may be stopped either automatically or manually. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 46, “+10” indicating that the ART game has been added by 10 games is displayed, and a state in which the ally character is dominant is displayed. That is, 10 games are added based on the fact that the right reel 20 is stopped and displayed. The middle reel 19 is in motion. 91B corresponds to timing (B) to timing (C) of the timing chart in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 91C, the liquid crystal display device 46 displays a display image of “tap the start lever!” Which urges the operation of the start lever 10, and the ally character and the enemy character face each other. Is displayed. Not only the start lever but also the MAX BET button 8 may be operated. Further, FIG. 91C corresponds to timing (B) to timing (C) of the timing chart in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 91 (D), the middle reel 19 is stopped and displayed based on the operation of the start lever 10. At this time, on the middle reel 19, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle reel upper stage, the "blue seven" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle reel middle stage, and the "replay A" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle reel lower stage. ing. In other words, in this state, the "blue seven" symbol on the left reel middle, the "blue seven" symbol on the middle reel middle, and the "blue seven" symbol on the right reel middle are all displayed together and stopped. In the liquid crystal display device 46, “+100” (+120 in TOTAL) indicating that the ART game has been added to the 100 games is displayed, and a state in which the ally character is dominant is displayed. As shown in FIG. 91 (D), when the symbol “blue seven” is stopped and displayed on the middle line, the game in the freeze state is continued, and the process shifts to FIG. 91 (A) again. Incidentally, whether the game in the freeze state is continued or not continued is continuously lottery performed when the operation of the start lever 10 in FIG. 91 (C) is performed. Further, FIG. 91 (D) corresponds to the timing (D) and after of the timing chart in FIG. 90 (a), and the chorus portion of the music A is being reproduced.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 91 (E), the middle reel 19 is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the start lever 10 is operated. At this time, in the middle reel 19, the "Cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle reel upper stage, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle reel middle stage, and the "blue seven" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle reel lower stage. . In other words, in this state, the "blue seven" symbol on the left reel middle, the "blue seven" symbol on the middle reel middle, and the "blue seven" symbol on the right reel middle will not be displayed together. In the liquid crystal display device 46, "+20", which is the number of super-games of TOTAL, is displayed, and a state in which the teammate character is inferior is displayed. As shown in FIG. 91E, when the symbol "blue seven" is not displayed stopped in the middle line, the game in the freeze state is not continued, and the freeze effect is ended. Further, FIG. 91 (D) corresponds to the timing (D) and after of the timing chart in FIG. 90 (b), and the chorus portion of the music A is not reproduced. In addition, as for the effect pattern corresponding to the character image displayed in FIG. 91 (A) and FIG. 91 (B), when the game continues, the effect pattern in which the ally character is dominant is selected with high probability, If the game is not continued, it is possible to select the effect pattern in which the ally character is inferior with high probability and to suggest the result in advance.

(Volume graph in Figure 92)
Next, description will be made using the volume graph of FIG. FIG. 92 is a graph showing the relationship between the sound output time and the volume when the music is output. In FIG. 92, the numerical value indicated by the vertical axis represents the volume, and the unit is represented by “dB (decibel)”. Further, the smaller the negative value is, the larger the volume value is, and the larger the swing width is, the larger the volume value is, based on “∞”. The graph shown in FIG. 92 (a) shows, for example, the sound emitted from the upper left speaker 40 and the upper right speaker 42, and the graph shown in FIG. 92 (b) is, for example, the lower left speaker 41. , And the sound emitted from the lower right speaker 43. That is, only the speakers to be output are different, which indicates that one music piece is output at the same timing, and shows a waveform in which a so-called stereo sound is output.

  First, after the music is output, the sound is output at the same volume until timing (B). Then, at timing (B), the sound output of the music is silenced until timing (C). That is, the music is not output from timing (B) to timing (C). It should be noted that since the sound is in a silent state for a short time, the player can hear the sound as if it were interrupted for a moment. Note that the reverberation effect (delay processing) is applied to the music at the timing when the timing (A) is reached, and the reverberation effect appears gradually after the timing (B).

  Next, from timing (C) to timing (D), the sound is output again at the same volume, and the volume is reduced during a part of the period.

  Next, from timing (D) to timing (E), the sound output of the music is muted again. Therefore, in combination with the timing (B) to the mute (T) of the timing (C), the player can hear the sound without interruption. Note that providing such a muffling period can make the reverberation effect of the sound clearer than in the case where the muffling period is not provided, and a clear reverberation sound is emitted to the player. Can.

  Next, from timing (E) to timing (F), the sound is output again at the same volume, and the volume is reduced during a part of the period.

  Next, from timing (F) to timing (G), the sound output of the music is muted again. Therefore, in combination with the timing (B) to the timing (C) mute and the timing (D) to the timing (E) mute, the player can hear the sound without interruption.

  Next, at the timing (G), the volume is set to be smaller than the volume when the sound is output until the timing (G). In addition, even if it is the largest volume, the volume emitted after reaching timing (G) is configured to be smaller than the volume output before reaching timing (G). Therefore, after the timing (B) is reached, the music gradually becomes discontinuous, and after the timing (G) is reached, the volume of the music gradually decreases.

  Next, from timing (G) to timing (H), the sound is emitted so as to finely increase and decrease the volume. As described above, the maximum sound volume between the timing (G) and the timing (H) is configured to be smaller than the sound volume emitted before reaching the timing (G).

  Next, from timing (H) to timing (I), the sound output of the music is muted again. Therefore, the sound is interrupted while combining the timing (B) to the timing (C), the timing (D) to the timing (E), and the timing (F) to the timing (G). By adjusting the sound volume from timing (G) to timing (H), the music is configured to be gradually reduced.

  Next, at the timing (I), the volume is set to be smaller than the volume output from the timing (G) to the timing (H). In both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the volume of the sound output after reaching the timing (I) is the timing (H) from the timing (G) even if the volume is the largest. It is configured to be smaller than the volume that was being emitted during the period. Therefore, after the timing (B) is reached, the sound gradually breaks off, and as the timing (G) and the timing (I) are reached, the volume is gradually reduced. .

  Next, from timing (I) to timing (J), the sound is emitted so as to finely increase and decrease the volume. As described above, in both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the maximum volume between timing (I) and timing (J) is between timing (G) and timing (H). It is configured to be smaller than the volume of the sound that was being emitted at.

  Next, from timing (J) to timing (K), the sound output of the music is muted again. Therefore, the mute of the timing (B) to the timing (C), and the mute of the timing (D) to the timing (E), the mute of the timing (F) to the timing (G), the timing (H) to the timing (I) The sound volume is gradually decreased by the volume adjustment of the timing (H) from the timing (G) and the volume adjustment of the timing (I) to the timing (J) while the sound is discontinuously combined with the mute. Is configured.

  Next, at the timing (K), the volume is set to be smaller than the volume output from the timing (I) to the timing (J). In both FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the volume of the sound output after the timing (K) is the timing (I) to the timing (J) even if the volume is the largest. It is configured to be smaller than the volume that was being emitted during the period. Therefore, after reaching the timing (B), the sound gradually breaks off, and the volume gradually decreases as the timing (G), the timing (I), and the timing (K) are reached. Is configured.

  Next, from timing (K) to timing (L), sound is emitted so as to finely increase and decrease the volume. As described above, in both of FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the maximum volume between timing (K) and timing (L) is between timing (I) and timing (J). It is configured to be smaller than the volume of the sound that was being emitted at.

  Next, at timing (L), the sound output of the music is silenced again, and after the timing (L) is reached, the sound emission of the music is silenced for a predetermined period. In addition, the time which is in the muffling after reaching the timing (L) is from the timing (B) to the timing (C) and from the timing (D) to the timing (E) and the timing (F) And timing (G) and between timing (H) and timing (I) and between timing (J) and timing (K).

  The sound output shown in FIG. 92 (a) is carried by the upper left speaker 40 and the upper right speaker 42, and the sound output shown in FIG. 92 (b) is transmitted to the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43. It can be considered to be responsible. That is, although the sound volume is gradually reduced while the sound gradually breaks in both FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the sound volume is more than that in FIG. 92 (a). It is shown that 92 (b) is set larger. Thus, for example, it is assumed that medals are paid out to the tray unit 38 by setting the volume outputted from the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43 to be higher than that of the upper left speaker 40 and the upper right speaker 42. Also, it is possible to prevent the sound output from the lower left speaker 41 and the lower right speaker 43 from being scratched out by the sound of paying out the medals.

(Timing chart 7 in FIG. 93)
Next, description will be made using the timing chart 7 of FIG. Note that “Song A”, “Successive sound”, “BET sound”, “Reel rotation start sound”, “Stop sound”, “Payout sound”, and “Speech prompting operation of effect button” in FIG. Since the contents are the same as the contents described in the description of FIG. Further, the processing until the dispensing sound is on is the same as that in FIG. 84, so the description will be omitted. Note that “delay” refers to processing that gives reverberation to the music, and when “delay” is ON, the sound gradually breaks off and the volume gradually decreases Configured as. For example, in FIG. 92, “delay” is ON between timing (A) and timing (L). On the other hand, when the "delay" is off, the music is output at a constant volume. For example, in FIG. 92, “delay” is OFF until timing (A) is reached. Further, “Vol” indicates a volume (volume), and when the volume is “0”, it indicates a state in which no sound is output, and when the volume is “100”, It shows a state in which the sound is emitted at the maximum value. In addition, since the maximum value is simply set to "100" for convenience, the value of the maximum value can be arbitrarily changed, and any value can be set as long as it is between "0" and "100". It is supposed to be.

  At timing (L), the delay is turned on. That is, after the payout is performed, the sound being output is interrupted, and the volume is gradually reduced. Timing (L) in FIG. 93 corresponds to timing (A) in FIG.

  Note that after the delay is turned on (L), after the volume has dropped from "100" to "0" to indicate "Vol", raising the volume to "100" twice is repeated twice, Lower it from "100" to "0", raise it to "80" and lower it to "0" again. After that, raise it to about “50” and lower it to “0” again. After that, it is raised to about “30” and lowered again to “0”, and thereafter it is kept “0”. Therefore, for the player, the sound may be interrupted and the sound may be heard to gradually decrease in volume. Note that timing (L) to timing (O) in FIG. 93 correspond to timing (A) to timing (L) in FIG.

  Next, at timing (M), a sound is generated to urge the operation of the effect button (effect button 21). For example, a sound such as “press!” Corresponds to the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button. Then, after the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is output, at timing (N), the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is silenced. That is, the sound for prompting the operation of the effect button is immediately muted after the notification for urging the operation of the effect button is performed.

  Although not illustrated, at timing (M), the effect button 21 changes from the operation non-accepting state to the operation accepting state. When in the operation accepting state, the operation of the effect button 21 is accepted. Then, when the effect button 21 is operated while in this operation accepting state, in the example of FIG. 93, a lottery result (hit) to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) for the player is made. It is supposed to be informed. The operation acceptance state is configured from a predetermined time, and the time when it is in the operation acceptance state corresponds to the operation valid period in the present invention.

  Then, at timing (O), by outputting a success sound, notification of transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, ART state) will be made. Then, the sound output of the music piece A is turned off, and the delay is also turned off. Then, at timing (P), the success sound is silenced.

  In the case of a hit, since the state shifts from the chance zone to, for example, the ART state, the music piece A turned ON in the chance zone is turned off. The second period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (L) to timing (O) in FIG. The first period in the present invention corresponds to the period from timing (A) in FIG. 93 to timing (L). Note that the period from the timing (A) in FIG. 93 to the timing (J) at which the third stopping operation is finished may be set as the first period. The timing (timing (M)) to turn on the sound prompting the operation of the effect button may be set to timing (O) at which “Vol” becomes “0” or later than timing (O). . In this case, after a predetermined time elapses after the mute state, for example, a voice such as "press!" Is emitted, and it becomes easier to hear the notification that prompts the operation of the effect button.

(Timing chart 8 in FIG. 94)
Next, description will be made using the timing chart 8 of FIG. FIG. 94 is another example of FIG. In addition, since "the music A" in FIG. 94 is the same as the content described by the description of FIG. 84-FIG. 88, description is abbreviate | omitted. Also, "in game" indicates a state in which a player is playing a game, and, for example, timing (A) to timing (O) in FIG. 93 correspond to the game in FIG. On the other hand, "non-playing" indicates that the player has not played a game, and for example, timing (A) in FIG. 93 or timing (O) or later is said in FIG. 94. It corresponds during non-game. Further, in FIG. 94, a delay process (a process of applying a reverberation effect to a sound) is performed on the “music A”. Note that, in the delay process, the data itself of the “music A” may be processed, or sound data subjected to the delay process may be stored in advance.

  First, in FIG. 94 (a), at timing (A), when a game is started by the player, a song based on the song A is output. Then, at timing (B), delay processing (processing to apply a reverberation effect to the sound) is performed on the music of "music A". Then, from the timing (B) to the timing (C), the song subjected to the delay processing is output.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 94 (b), when the game is started by the player at timing (A), a song based on the song A is output. Then, at timing (B), delay processing (processing to apply a reverberation effect to the sound) is performed on the music of "music A". Then, from the timing (B) to the timing (C), the song subjected to the delay processing is output. In FIG. 94 (b), the game time required for one game is longer than in the example shown in FIG. 94 (a). That is, the player who is playing a game in the example shown in FIG. 94 (b) assumes a player who takes time to stop symbols etc. and is not accustomed to the game. As described above, when a player who is not used to playing a game is playing a game, from delay (C) to timing (D), using delay SE, which is dedicated sound data to which only delay processing has been performed, It is configured to apply a reverberation effect to the sound. The delay SE can be looped. By configuring in this way, even if a player who is not used to playing a game needs time to play, the reverberation effect of the sound is not interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a drop in the rendering effect. The delay SE is stored in the sound source ROM 606 as dedicated sound data.

(Timing chart 9 in FIG. 95)
Next, description will be made using the timing chart 9 of FIG. In addition, since "the music A" in FIG. 95 is the same as the content described by the description of FIG. 84-FIG. 88, description is abbreviate | omitted. Among the "states managed by the sub control board", "Bonus preparation state" is the state indicated by the number "05" in FIG. 22, and the "first bonus state" is the number "in FIG. The “third bonus state” is a state indicated by a number “08” in FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 95 (a), the music A reproduced in the "first bonus state" and "sabi", "interplay", and "a melody" which are elements constituting the music A are shown. . Also, in FIG. 95 (b), "prelude", "A melody", "B melody", "Sabi", "Song", which are elements constituting music A reproduced in "the third bonus state" and music A. "Interplay" is shown. In FIG. 95 (a), the music A is reproduced in the order of "Sabi", "Interplay", and "A Melo". Further, in FIG. 95 (b), the music piece A is reproduced in the order of "prelude", "A melody", "B melody", "sabi", and "interplay". In addition, when all the elements constituting the music piece A are reproduced, if they are still in the "Bonus state", they may be reproduced from the head again (it may be looped). Further, in FIG. 95 (a), only the chorus portion may be reproduced repeatedly. Note that the music A reproduced in the "first bonus state" and the music A reproduced in the "third bonus state" are composed of the same music, and the "third bonus state" in the "first bonus state". Is configured to reproduce a part of the music A to be reproduced. Incidentally, the "prelude" portion in FIG. 95 (b) constitutes a normal reproduction portion which is the first timing in the present invention, and the "sabi" portion in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b). In the present invention, the second timing, that is, a specific reproduction portion is configured.

  As described above, the "first bonus state" is composed of 30 games, and the "third bonus state" is composed of 50 games. The “3rd Bonus State” is configured to be longer than the “1st Bonus State” in the possible period). In the present invention, the "first bonus state" constitutes a first benefit game advantageous to the player, and the "third bonus state" is a second benefit game advantageous to the player more than the first benefit game. Configure.

(1st Bonus state)
First, in FIG. 95 (a), at the timing when the state transitions from "Bonus preparation state" to "first Bonus state", the chorus portion of music A is output. Then, when the reproduction of the chorus part is finished, the interlude part of the music A is outputted, and when the reproduction of the interlude part of the music A is ended, the A melody part of the music A is outputted. Then, when the “first bonus state” ends (the 30 games are ended), the music A is turned off.

(3rd Bonus state)
Next, in FIG. 95 (b), at the timing when the state transitions from "Bonus preparation state" to "third Bonus state", the prelude portion of the music A is output. Then, when reproduction of the prelude portion is finished, the A melody portion is outputted, and when the reproduction of the A melody portion is ended, the B melody portion is emitted and when the reproduction of the B melody portion is ended, the rust portion is emitted. When playback of the chorus part ends, the interlude part is sounded out. Then, when the "third bonus state" ends (the game of the 50 games ends), the music A is turned off.

  If it is assumed that the first bonus state is digested in 4.1 seconds per game, it takes 123 seconds (4.1 seconds × 30 games) from the start to the end of the first bonus state. Similarly, if the third bonus state is consumed at 4.1 seconds per game, it takes 205 seconds (4.1 seconds × 50 games) from the start to the end of the third bonus state. Note that "Sabi" of the music A is provided at a point reproduced for 140 seconds from the start of the music A ("prelude"). For this reason, when the first Bonus state is digested in the above-mentioned game digest time, "Sabi" can not be heard, and when the third Bonus state is digested in the above game digest time, "Sabi" can be heard. From such a relationship, in the first Bonus state, "Sabi" is regenerated from the start of the first Bonus state. By configuring in this manner, even a player playing a game in the above-described game digest time can listen to the "sabi" of the music.

  In other words, as in the first Bonus state, there are few games that can be played by Bonus games, so that the game is played from the middle of the music, and the Bonus state where there are many Bonus playable games like the third Bonus state is the beginning of the music. Since it is possible to play from the beginning, even in the “first bonus state” where there are few game-playable games, it is possible to listen to the chorus part that constitutes the most exciting part of the music, so preventing decline in gaming interest it can.

  A big bonus can be applied as the second benefit game, and a regular bonus can be applied as the first benefit game. Further, the ART state in which the initial game number is short can be applied as the first bonus game, and the ART state in which the initial game number is long can be applied as the second bonus game.

  In addition, in FIG. 95, although the pachi-slot was mentioned as an example and it demonstrated, you may apply to a pachinko machine. In addition, when applied to a pachinko machine, for example, applying a jackpot (for example, 5 round jackpots) with a small number of round games as a first benefit game, for example, a jackpot with a large number of round games (for example, , 16 rounds can be applied). In this case, in the case of five rounds of jackpot, it is conceivable to reproduce from the chorus part, and in the case of sixteen rounds of jackpot, it is considered to reproduce from the prelude part. According to this structure, the same effect as that of the pachislot machine can be obtained.

(About the relationship between the withdrawal time and the withdrawal sound)
Next, the relationship between the payout time and the payout sound will be described using the timing chart 10 of FIG. In FIG. 96, for example, when “pushing order bell A1” of winning number “32” is won and symbol combinations constituting “pushing order bell A1” are stopped and displayed on the active line (the number of payouts) The explanation will be made on the basis of the example of 9-sheet delivery).

  In addition, when dispensing is performed, it is configured to dispense medals at different dispensing times as a dispensing time per medal, depending on when storing in credits and when dispensing to the tray unit 38. It is done.

(Credit signal)
The credit signal shown in FIG. 96 indicates the payout time when storing the credit. This credit signal is configured to be paid out at a payout time of 100 ms per medal. In FIG. 96, the credit signal is turned ON nine times to pay out nine sheets. Also, the interval between the payouts is configured, for example, at 20 ms. That is, the time required for dispensing the nine-sheet payout to be stored in the credit is 1060 ms in total of 100 ms × 9 (sheets) and 20 ms × 8 (number of intervals).

(Discharge command signal)
The dispensing instruction signal shown in FIG. 96 indicates the dispensing time when dispensing to the tray unit 38. The payout command signal is configured to be paid out at a payout time of 77 ms per medal. In FIG. 96, the payout command signal is ON nine times in order to pay out nine sheets. Also, the interval between the payouts is configured, for example, at 20 ms. That is, the time required for dispensing the nine-sheet payout to be stored in the credit is 85 ms in total of 77 ms × 9 (sheets) and 20 ms × 8 (interval number).

(Discharge sound)
The payout sound shown in FIG. 96 is a payout sound used together with the payout when storing in the credit and the payout when paying out to the tray unit 38, and the payout when storing in the credit and the receiving unit 38. In both of the payout and the payout, the payout sound consisting of the sound output time of 1700 ms is output (FIG. 106 described later). That is, the sound emitting time of the dispensing sound is configured to be longer than the dispensing time (1060 ms as described above) for storing in the credit, and is longer than the dispensing time (853 ms as described above) when dispensing to the tray unit 38 It consists of a long time. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the 9-sheet payout combination is elected and stopped on the activated line. For example, the 1-sheet payout combination is elected and the 1-sheet payout combination is formed on the activated line. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped and displayed, a payout sound consisting of 1700 ms may be output, or a sound output time (for example, 200 ms) slightly longer than the time required for the payout of one sheet It is also possible to emit the disbursed sound.

  That is, even if it is a payout when storing in credits or a payout when paying out to the tray unit 38, a payout sound composed of a time longer than the time required for each payout is emitted. The player can be given the feeling that more game media have been paid out than the actual number of payouts, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

  In the present embodiment, like the chance number CN1 of the winning number "29", the payout sound composed of a time longer than the time required for the payout in the case of the winning combination with a small number of payouts (one payout number). Can be made to notice that the player is paying out.

  The payout sound may be a payout sound composed of the same payout time regardless of the gaming state as long as the winning combination is the same. For example, in the gaming state (for example, the first RT gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player, when the common bell of the winning number "31" is won and in the gaming state which is advantageous for the player (for example, the fourth RT gaming state) When the common bell of the winning number "31" is won, in either case, a payout sound of 1700 ms may be output.

  In addition, when the payout is performed over the upper limit (50 sheets) of the number of storage (for example, when the number of stored is 45 and the 9-sheet payout winning combination is won), the medal 1 is held up to the upper limit of the number of storage. It may be configured to pay out in a payout time of 100 ms per sheet, and may be configured to pay out in a payout time of 77 ms per medal after exceeding the upper limit value of the storage number.

  In addition, when the payout is performed over the upper limit (50 sheets) of the number of storage (for example, when the number of stored is 45 and the 9-sheet payout winning combination is won), the medal 1 is held up to the upper limit of the number of storage. Each sheet may be configured to be dispensed in a payout time of 100 ms, and may be configured to be dispensed in a payout time of 100 ms per medal even after the upper limit value of the storage number is exceeded.

  When the game medium settlement means (settlement button 9) is operated by the player while the medals are stored in the game medium storage means, the medals are paid out to the tray unit 38. In this case, it is configured to pay out in 77 ms of payout time per medal (based on the payout time paid out to the saucer unit 38), and the payout sound is configured in a time equal to the time required for payout. Sound is output. For example, when ten game media are stored, the time required for the payout when the settlement button 9 is operated by the player is 77 ms × 10 (sheets), and the interval between payouts is 20 ms × 9 (the interval between payouts). And the interval count), and the total is 950 ms. As a dispensing sound at this time, a dispensing sound in which the sound continues to be output for 950 ms is output. As the payout sound, it is conceivable to store in advance in the sound source ROM 606 a payout sound constituted by a time equal to the payout time corresponding to each of the 1 to 50 storable sheets. By configuring as described above, when the settlement button 9 is operated and the game is ended, it is possible to give the player a feeling that payout more than the settlement number has been performed.

  The dispensing sound may store data corresponding to the dispensing sound of 1700 ms, and the data may be output once at the time of dispensing, for example, it may be 170 ms. The data corresponding to the payout sound may be stored, and the data may be output ten times. In addition, it may be made to play by looping out the dispensing sound constituted by 170 ms.

  The payout sound is configured, for example, as shown in FIG. FIG. 106 (a) shows the waveform of the payout sound of the bell combination made in the RT1 gaming state (for example, in the normal gaming state), and FIG. 106 (b) shows the RT4 gaming state (in the FIG. 106 (b) For example, it shows the waveform of the disbursed sound of the bell combination (including the push order bell) awarded in the ART state). The vertical axis indicates the sound volume, and the horizontal axis indicates the sound output time. The sound output time is 1700 ms, and (a) RT1 gaming state in FIG. 106 (for example, normal gaming state) than in RT4 gaming state (for example, ART state) in (b) in FIG. 106 The sound output time of the sound to which the reverberation effect is applied is longer in the case of). As described above, even in the case of the bell combination configured with the same number of payouts, it is also possible to give a feeling that different combinations have won by emitting a different payout sound depending on the state. Note that the payout sound shown in FIG. 106 (a) may be emitted in the RT4 gaming state (for example, in the ART state), and the payout sound shown in FIG. 106 (b) in the RT1 gaming state (for example, Sound may be emitted during the normal gaming state).

(Timing chart 11 of FIG. 97)
Next, based on the timing chart 11 of FIG. 97, volume control in the case where an error occurs during the output of the effect sound will be described.

  The “error sound” shown in FIG. 97 is a sound for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error, and indicates that it is output as data when it is ON, and is not output as data when it is OFF. Is an indicator of Further, as described above, the “music A” is a sound such as a predetermined BGM for presentation, and indicates whether or not to output. Furthermore, “Vol” indicates the volume at which a sound such as “error sound” or “music A” is output.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the state where a normal error is not detected, the effect sound such as "Song A" is output at a predetermined volume level, for example, "50". The volume level is determined by an initial value previously determined in the gaming machine 1, a level set by the player, a value set in audio data such as "music A" to be output, or the like. In the present embodiment, the volume level "100" indicates the maximum volume that the gaming machine 1 can output. Further, the volume level “50” and the volume level “0” are the magnitude of the volume according to the ratio to the volume level “100”.

  Next, at timing (A), when a predetermined error is detected, the output of "music A" being output is muted, and an "error sound" corresponding to the error is read out and output. Specifically, when an error is input via the sub control board 400, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 mutes the output sound of "music A". More specifically, the channel outputting "music A" of each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) is muted.

  Then, the sound source IC 605 reads out the corresponding “error sound” from the sound source ROM 606, and outputs it to the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier board 500. Do. Further, at this time, the sound source IC 605 sets the volume level to the maximum “100” and outputs it in response to the detection of the error. At this time, the volume level is "100" regardless of the setting of the volume level. Therefore, when an error is detected, an "error sound" is output at the maximum volume of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, at timing (B), when the detection of the error is canceled, the output of the “error sound” is stopped, and the output of the “music A” is restored. Further, at this time, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 returns the volume level from the maximum “100” to the original volume level “50” and outputs “music A” with the release of the error.

(Channel control process of liquid crystal control CPU)
Next, channel management processing of each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 will be described. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 generates a channel state management map in the liquid crystal control RAM 603 in order to manage the audio output of the channel of each speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). ing.

(Channel state management map for speakers of liquid crystal control CPU)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a channel state management map generated by the liquid crystal control CPU 601 in the liquid crystal control RAM 603. As shown in FIG. 98, in the channel state management map, voice data being output is stored for each of the fixed channels 00CH to 05CH and the variable channels 06CH to 39CH. Furthermore, in the channel state management map, along with the audio data being output, the priority of the output of the audio data, the output order of the output, and the remaining reproduction time are stored.

  Note that “H”, “M”, and “L” in the priority order indicate high level, middle level and low level, respectively, the priority order “H” is the highest priority, and the next is the priority order “M”. , Priority "L" indicates the lowest priority. Further, the remaining reproduction time stored in the channel state management map is subtracted by the interruption process of the liquid crystal control CPU 601. Then, when the remaining reproduction time becomes "0", the output of the audio data of the channel is completed and the channel state management map is deleted.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 that generates such a channel state management map receives the output designation command, it searches for a channel (fixed channel) designated by the audio data for which the output designation command is designated for output. Update the area of the corresponding fixed channel in the state management map. The audio data designated by the output designation command, that is, the output of the system sound is output from the fixed channel designated in advance regardless of the channel availability. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 updates the channel state management map with respect to the designated fixed channel as described above regardless of the channel availability. The output designation command is input from the liquid crystal control CPU 601 to the sound source IC 605 and the like, and the sound source IC 605 reads desired voice data from the sound source ROM 606 and the like according to the output designation command and causes the speaker to output.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect specification command, it determines the effect output sound data based on the effect specification command as described above, and determines whether the corresponding sound data is stereo sound data or monaural sound data, Determine

  When it is determined that the corresponding audio data is stereo audio data, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 refers to the channel state management map, sequentially from the even channel in the lower direction from 06CH, and continuously sets two channels from the even channel as empty channels. Search for the channel that is turned on.

  In the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG. 98, first, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for 06CH. Since the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores data in the 06CH and is in use, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 then searches the 08CH. Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for 09 CH because 08 CH is vacant, but since data is stored and in use for 09 CH, next, 10 CH is searched. Next, since the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the 11 CH and confirms that the 11 CH is free, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets the 10 CH and the 11 CH as output target channels and executes the audio output processing.

  On the other hand, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the corresponding audio data is not stereo audio data but monaural audio data, it refers to the channel state management map and sequentially becomes an empty channel in the upper direction from 39 CH. Search for a channel Here, when searching for an output channel for monaural audio data, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 has a channel in which only one of two continuous channels from the even channel is used and the other is an empty channel. In such a case, priority is given to such a vacant channel and searched as a vacant channel. As a result, it is possible to leave as much as possible two consecutive free channels from the even channel, and leave free channels for subsequent output of stereo audio data.

  In the example of the channel state management map shown in FIG. 98, first, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for free channels in order from 39 CH in the upper direction. Since liquid crystal control CPU 601 stores data in channel 09 and is in use, channel 08 is vacant, and therefore, channel 08 is set as an output target channel to execute audio output processing.

Next, processing in the case where there is no free channel will be described.
When there is no empty channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output of predetermined audio data, and outputs new audio data using the channel that has output this audio data. Hereinafter, a method of searching for voice data for stopping output will be described. Note that, as described above, the system sound is output from the fixed channel specified in advance regardless of the channel availability, so the process when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the output specification command is the process described above. Is the same as Therefore, as to the processing of the liquid crystal control CPU 601 described below, only the processing in the case of receiving the effect designation command will be described.

(Channel state management map that explains how to search for output stop audio data based on priority)
First, a method of searching for output stop audio data based on the priority order will be described.
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for describing search of output stop audio data based on priority.

  In FIG. 99, the data described in the upper part of the channel state management map indicates the content of audio data to be output this time. Further, in the audio data to be output, the reproduction time is stored. The same applies to FIGS. 100, 101, 102, and 105.

  When the audio data to be output is stereo audio data, the audio data to be stopped is also stereo audio data, and when the audio data to be output is monaural audio data, the audio data to be stopped is also monaural Target voice data. If the target data can not be searched among the stereo sound data and the monaural sound data, sound data of different types may be output stop target.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped according to the priority order from 06 CH to 39 CH. Here, the audio data whose output is to be stopped is the audio data whose priority is lower than the priority of the audio data to be output.

  A specific description is given below based on the output target voice data and the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 reads out the priority of the audio data to be output, and stores the priority “M” in the liquid crystal control RAM 603. Therefore, the priority order of the audio data for stopping the output is the priority order “L” and the priority order “M” that are lower than the priority order “M”.

Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the channel in which the priority "L" with the lowest priority is stored, from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map.
In the example of FIG. 99, since data of priority "L" is only 14CH, 14CH is determined as an output stop channel.
When audio data to be output is stereo audio data, as in the case of the search for an empty channel, the search is performed depending on whether two channels continuous from the even channel can be set as the output stop channel. You may go.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 can not search the target channel for the output stop in the priority order "L" from the storage area of the channel state management map 06CH to 39CH, the channel in which the priority order "M" is stored is used. In the same manner as the search in the priority order "L", search is performed to search for a target channel of output stop.

  Since the priority of the audio data to be output is the priority "M", the liquid crystal control CPU 601 can search for the target channel of the output stop in the priority "M" from the storage area of 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. If not, it is determined that there is no target channel for stopping output.

Next, processing in the case where a plurality of pieces of data having the same priority are searched will be described.
When a plurality of data having the same priority is searched, the following two methods will be described. That is, the first is the case in which the remaining reproduction time is short to be the target of the output stop, and the second is the case in which the reproduction start time to which the audio data is output is the old one to be the target of the output stop is there.

(Search for output stop audio data based on the remaining playback time)
First, a case where audio data having a short remaining reproduction time is set as a target of output stop will be described.
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining a search of output stop audio data based on the remaining reproduction time.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped according to the priority order from 06 CH to 39 CH. Here, when a plurality of pieces of data having the same priority are searched, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets audio data having a short remaining reproduction time as a target of output stop.

  A specific description will be given below based on the output target voice data and the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority. The channel search method of the output stop audio data based on the priority is the same as the above search method, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example of FIG. 100, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority, it selects 14CH and 15CH as data of the priority "L" as output stop channel candidates. ,Extract.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 compares the remaining reproduction time of each of the audio data, and extracts the channel with the shortest remaining reproduction time. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 extracts 15 CH as the channel having the shortest remaining reproduction time, and determines 15 CH as the target channel for stopping output.

(Search for output stop audio data based on playback start time)
Next, a case where the reproduction start time to which the audio data is output is old and the target of the output stop will be described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining the search of output stop audio data based on the reproduction start time.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped according to the output order from 06 CH to 39 CH. Here, when a plurality of pieces of data having the same priority are searched, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 sets audio data having an earlier reproduction start time as an output stop target.

  A specific description will be given below based on the examples of the audio data to be output and the channel state management map shown in FIG.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority. The channel search method of the output stop audio data based on the priority is the same as the above search method, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the example of FIG. 101, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped based on the priority, it selects 14CH and 15CH as data of priority "L" as output stop channel candidates. ,Extract.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 compares the output order to compare the reproduction start times of the respective audio data, and extracts the channel with the oldest output order from which the output of the audio data is started. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 extracts 14CH as the channel with the oldest reproduction start time, and determines 14CH as the target channel for stopping output.

(Overwrite output playback of the same audio data)
Next, the case of reproducing and outputting the same audio data as the audio data being output from the same channel will be described.
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining the overwrite output of the same voice.

  The liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect specifying command, and determines whether or not the same sound data as the sound data to be output by the effect specifying command is currently being output. When it is determined that the same audio data as the audio data to be output is currently being output, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output of the audio data being output, and newly uses the same channel. Output specified audio data.

  On the other hand, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the same audio data as the audio data to be output is not currently being output, it is output for output by the above-described idle channel search method or output stop channel specification method. The channel is searched, and the newly designated audio data is output from the searched channel.

  When the designated audio data is audio data for fixed channel output, and the output destination channel is fixed, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 causes the audio data to be output from the channel unique to the audio data.

  A specific description will be given below based on the audio data to be output shown in FIG. 102 and the example of the channel state management map.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines whether audio data to be output is audio data for a fixed channel or audio data for a variable channel. When it is determined that the audio data to be output is audio data for a fixed channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 causes the corresponding fixed CH (00CH to 05CH) to output specified audio data. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output of the audio data in use even when the corresponding fixed CH (00CH to 05CH) is in use, and newly outputs audio data from the channel.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the audio data to be output is audio data for a variable channel, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for variable CH (06CH to 39CH) and outputs the same audio data as the specified audio data. It is judged whether it is done or not. When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the same audio data as the specified audio data is output from any of the channels, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output of the audio data of the corresponding channel, and newly specified audio data ( The same audio data is output from the channel.

  In the example of FIG. 102, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for which of 06 CH to 39 CH is output as audio data "ESE" which is specified audio data. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 recognizes from this search that the signal is output from the 14CH, and stops the output from the 14CH. Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 causes the designated sound data "ESE" to be output from 14CH.

  On the other hand, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 determines that the audio data "ESE" is not output from any of the 06CH to 39CH, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs output according to the free channel search method described above or the output stop channel specification method. Search for a channel for the user, and output designated audio data "ESE" from the searched channel.

(Timing chart 12 of FIG. 103)
Next, a case where the same audio data as the audio data being output is reproduced and output from the same channel will be described based on the timing chart.
FIG. 103 shows a timing chart according to the overwrite output of the same voice.

  The “effect button SW” shown in FIG. 103 indicates whether or not the effect button 21 has been pressed. Specifically, ON of the "production button SW" indicates a state in which the production button sensor 710s has detected that the production button 21 has been pressed, and that "the production button SW" is OFF indicates that the production button sensor 710s is the production button 21. Indicates a state in which pressing of the key is not detected.

  Further, “CH writing” indicates a preparation state for enabling audio data to be output from the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). Specifically, ON of "CH write" indicates that the output preparation of audio data is in progress, and OFF of "CH write" indicates that the output preparation of audio data is completed or processing for output is not performed. Indicates the status.

  In addition, “sound output” represents an output state of sound from the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43), and “sound output” is turned on. Indicates that a sound is being output, and OFF of "sound output" indicates that no sound is being output. Note that this "sound output" is used as a data output status of audio data from the effect control board 600 via the amplifier board 500 to the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43). It is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 103, at timing (A), when the effect button sensor 710 s detects that the effect button 21 is pressed, the “effect button SW” is turned on.

  When the “display button SW” is turned on, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 turns on “write CH” at timing (B) to turn on the sound data corresponding to the depression of the effect button 21, for example, the sound data “ESE”. , And preparation for outputting to the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier substrate 500 is started. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs the audio data "ESE" from 14CH.

  Next, when preparation for outputting the audio data "ESE" is completed, at timing (C), the sound based on the audio data "ESE" is a speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right It is outputted from the speaker 43). As a result, "sound output" changes from OFF to ON.

  Next, at timing (D), when the effect button sensor 710 s detects that the effect button 21 is pressed while the sound based on the audio data “ESE” is output, the “effect button SW” is turned ON.

  When the "display button SW" is turned on, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 turns on "write CH" at timing (E) to turn on the audio data corresponding to the depression of the effect button 21, the same audio data "ESE" as described above. Preparation for reading out from the sound source ROM 606 and outputting to the speakers (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, lower right speaker 43) via the amplifier substrate 500 is started. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops the output from the 14CH outputting the same audio data "ESE" as the audio data "ESE" to be output this time. As a result, "sound output" is switched from ON to OFF. Further, new sound data "ESE" corresponding to pressing of the effect button 21 at timing (D) is output from 14CH.

Next, when preparation for output of new audio data "ESE" is completed, at timing (F), a sound based on audio data "ESE" is a speaker (upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, It is outputted from the lower right speaker 43). As a result, the state of "sound output" changes from OFF to ON again.
Thus, the same sound is continuously output using the same channel.

(Timing chart 13 in FIG. 104)
Next, a notification mode in the present invention will be described using the timing chart of FIG. Note that "liquid crystal display" in FIG. 104 indicates the display of liquid crystal in the liquid crystal display device 46, and indicates that the liquid crystal display device 46 is performing display if the liquid crystal display is ON. When the liquid crystal display is off, the liquid crystal display device 46 shows a state in which display is not performed. Further, in the “liquid crystal return state”, when the power is supplied, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs a return process, and a state until a notification (for example, notification of the operation order) becomes possible in the liquid crystal display device 46 is It shows. If the liquid crystal return state is ON, it indicates that the notification in the liquid crystal display device 46 is disabled, and if the liquid crystal return state is OFF, it indicates that the notification in the liquid crystal display device 46 is possible. There is. That is, when power is supplied from the power supply substrate 200, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 causes the liquid crystal display device 46 to transition from the incommunicable state to the incommunicable state after the return processing. Further, “liquid crystal notification” indicates that notification is performed by the display content of the liquid crystal display device 46. For example, in the ART state, when the winning order bell A1 of the winning number "32" is won, a notification image prompting the user to operate the middle stop button 12 first is displayed. That is, if the liquid crystal notification is ON, it indicates, for example, that the notification of the operation order of the push order bell combination is being performed, and if the liquid crystal notification is OFF, the notification of the operation order of the push order bell combination is Indicates that it has not been done. In the "lamp return state", the sub CPU 401 performs return processing when power is supplied, and the stop button operation display unit 35 is in a state until notification (for example, notification of the operation order) becomes possible. Is shown. If the lamp return state is ON, it indicates that the notification in the stop button operation display unit 35 is disabled, and if the lamp return state is OFF, the notification in the stop button operation display unit 35 is possible It is shown that. That is, when power is supplied from the power supply substrate 200, the sub CPU 401 causes the stop button operation display unit 35 to transition from the notification impossible state to the notification possible state after the return processing. Further, “lamp notification” indicates that notification is performed in the light emission mode of the stop button operation display unit 35. For example, in the ART state, when the winning order bell A1 of the winning number "32" is won, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C is made to emit light first so that the middle stop button 12 is operated first. That is, if the lamp notification is ON, for example, it indicates that the notification of the operation order of the push order bell combination is performed, and if the lamp notification is OFF, the notification of the operation order of the push order bell combination is Indicates that it has not been done. In FIG. 104, it is assumed that the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is the RT4 gaming state, and the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state.

  First, at timing (A), on the condition that the liquid crystal display is ON and the liquid crystal return state is OFF, notification by liquid crystal is performed. Further, on the condition that the lamp return state is OFF, notification by the lamp is performed. Thus, for example, in the ART state, when the winning order bell A1 of the winning number "32" is won, the liquid crystal display device 46 and the stop button operation display unit 35 notify that the middle stop button 12 is operated first. Will be done.

  Next, at timing (B), the power supply becomes lower than a predetermined value due to a power failure or the like, and all of the liquid crystal display, the liquid crystal notification, and the lamp notification are turned off. In the example of FIG. 104, assuming that the winning order bell A1 of the winning number “32” is won in the ART state, the timing (B) is reached in a state where no stop button is pressed. I suppose.

  Next, at timing (C), the power is supplied again to turn on the liquid crystal display and turn on the liquid crystal return state, and the liquid crystal return process is started. In addition, the lamp recovery state is turned on, and the lamp recovery process is started.

  Next, at timing (D), the lamp return state is turned off and the lamp notification is turned on. At timing (D), the liquid crystal return state continues to be ON, and the liquid crystal display device 46 displays, for example, “returning” or the like.

  Next, at timing (E), the liquid crystal return state is turned off and the liquid crystal notification is turned on. That is, after the power is supplied, the stop button operation display unit 35 is performed after the power is supplied between the timing (C) and the timing (E) in the period required for the liquid crystal display device 46 to be able to notify. The period required for the notification to be possible at time t is between timing (C) and timing (D). Therefore, the stop button operation display unit 35 is faster than the liquid crystal display device 46 that the notification can be made after the power is supplied. In addition, as a factor which time until it becomes alerting possible with liquid crystal display 46 and stop button operation display part 35, (a) each restoration processing time itself is different, (b) restoration processing time Although it is the same time, the time until the player can confirm the notification situation is different, and the like.

  Then, at timing (C), information on the winning order bell A1 of winning number “32” is acquired from the winning combination information storage means, and at timing (D), the stop button operation display unit 35 is used. And the notification of the operation order of the pushing order bell A1 of the winning number "32" is started.

  Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off under the situation where the winning order bell A1 of the winning number “32” is won, if the power is supplied again, the liquid crystal display device 46 does not wait for the return. Since the notification of the operation order of the pushing order bell A1 of the winning number "32" is started using the stop button operation display unit 35 which can be notified earlier, the player can stop the stop button operation display unit 35. If the stop button is operated in accordance with the operation order notified by, the symbol combination of the correct bell relating to the pushing order bell A1 of the winning number “32” can be stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of playing a game without giving annoyance to a player who wants to accelerate the game.

  Note that at timing (B), the power supply monitoring means for determining whether or not the supplied power supply has become equal to or less than the predetermined value may be carried by each of the main control board 300 and the sub control board 400. Alternatively, a power-off signal may be transmitted to the main control board 300 and the sub-control board when the power supply becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value.

  The above configuration can also be configured as follows. In the above configuration, in the sub control board 400, the stop button operation display unit 35 is controlled, and in the effect control board 600, the liquid crystal display device 46 is controlled, but in the main control board 300, The stop button operation display unit 35 may be connected to control the stop button operation display unit 35 in the main control board 300. Even in such a case, at the time of power supply, the stop button operation display unit 35 controlled by the main control board 300 notifies more than the time until the liquid crystal display device 46 controlled by the effect control board 600 becomes alertable. It is possible to shorten the time until it becomes possible, and use the stop button operation display unit 35 controlled by the main control board 300 that can be notified earlier to inform the operation order of the pushing order bell combination, thereby making the game Can be made to progress. In this case, it is assumed that the ART state is managed by the main control board 300 and the operation order relating to the push order bell is managed by the main control board 300 to execute the ART state.

Next, when outputting audio data, processing for stopping output of predetermined audio data and outputting new audio data will be described regardless of the priority of the audio data to be output.
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 outputs new audio data using an empty channel when there is an empty channel, and stops it according to the priority order of audio data being output when there is no empty channel. Audio data is determined, and new audio data is output using a channel that has output this audio data.

  When the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives the effect designation command, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped according to the priority order from 06 CH to 39 CH.

Further, when voice data having the same priority is searched, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 stops outputting the voice data according to the remaining reproduction time and output order of the voice data as in the above-described search method. Search channels
Hereinafter, a process of searching for a channel of audio data whose output is to be stopped according to the remaining reproduction time of audio data when audio data having the same priority is searched will be described.

(How to search for output stop audio data based on priority of audio data being output only)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a channel state management map for explaining a method of searching for output stop audio data based on only the priority of audio data being output regardless of the priority of audio data to be output.

  First, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches the storage area of the channel status management map 06 CH to 39 CH for a channel in which audio data with low priority is stored. Specifically, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the channel in which the priority "L" with the lowest priority is stored, from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. In the example of FIG. 105, since the data of priority "L" is not stored, it shifts to the search of the next priority.

  Next, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 searches for the channel in which the priority "M" having the next lowest priority is stored, from the storage areas 06CH to 39CH of the channel state management map. In the example of FIG. 105, although the data of priority "M" is up to 06 CH-14 CH, the output target audio data is monaural audio data, so 10 CH, 11 CH and 14 CH which are monaural audio data are output Extract as a candidate for the stop channel.

  Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 compares the remaining reproduction time of each of the audio data, and extracts the channel with the shortest remaining reproduction time. Therefore, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 extracts 14CH as a channel having the shortest remaining reproduction time, and determines 14CH as a target channel for stopping output.

  By the above processing, the target channel for stopping output is determined, and the output of the audio data output from the determined channel can be stopped, and new audio data specified from the channel can be output.

Second Embodiment
Next, output control of a lamp or the like performed in the same manner as the audio output control will be described. Output control of lamps etc. includes control of various lamps such as lighting, extinguishing and blinking, control of various LEDs lighting, extinguishing and blinking, etc., control of various driving devices such as motors of rendering devices, etc. It shall be Hereinafter, unless otherwise stated, it is simply referred to as lamp output control.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific detection result is obtained by detection of an error, detection of an operation related to a game such as lever operation, or the like, a specific detection result is obtained for the system sound to be output as voice. A lamp that lights, blinks, and extinguishes when it is turned off is called a system lamp. Further, in each control output designation command for a specific detection result, the voice output control command is called voice output designation command, and the lamp output control command is called system lamp command.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, differences from the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment will be mainly described, the same reference numerals are given to the same components, and the same configuration and control will be described. Omit.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration diagram of a main part of a gaming machine for describing lamp output control and sound output control in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 300, a sub control board 400a, a backlight relay board 450, an amplifier board 500, an effect control board 600a, and an effect device drive board. A control panel relay board 700a, a rendering device drive relay board 750, and a presentation button relay board 900 are provided.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is the same as the main control board 300 in the first embodiment. Further, in the main control board 300, a sub control board 400a is connected instead of the sub control board 400 in the first embodiment.

(Sub control board 400a)
The sub control board 400 a is connected to the effect control board 600 a and connected to the effect button relay board 900. Therefore, the sub control board 400a is not directly connected to the control panel relay board 700a, and transmits a command or the like to the control panel relay board 700a via the effect control board 600a. The configuration of the sub control substrate 400a is the same as that of the sub control substrate 400 in the first embodiment.

Further, when the sub CPU 401 receives a command indicating a specific detection result from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 transmits an audio output specification command and a system lamp command corresponding to the specific detection result to the effect control board 600a. For example, when the sub CPU 401 receives the "lever reception command" from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 transmits an audio output designation command for outputting a sound at the time of lever reception to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600a. The system lamp command for lighting the lamp when the lever is received is transmitted to the lamp CPU 608 of the effect control board 600a.
In the present embodiment, although transmission is performed as described above, the sub CPU 401 may directly transmit an audio output specification command to the sound source IC 605 of the effect control board 600a, or the audio output may be output. Both the designated command and the system lamp command may be transmitted to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600a.

  Further, when the sub-control board 400a determines a predetermined effect, the sub-control board 400a transmits, to the effect control board 600a, an effect specifying command (including a lamp effect, a sound effect, etc.) based on the effect content. For example, when the sub control board 400a determines to execute the step-up effect, the sub control board 400a transmits an effect designating command for designating the step-up effect to the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of the effect control board 600a.

  The backlight relay substrate 450 is connected to the effect control substrate 600a, and the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Then, the backlight relay substrate 450 generates a lamp lighting signal (a signal specifying lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the left backlight 461, the middle backlight 462, and the right backlight 463) specified by the system lamp command from the effect control substrate 600a. When received, it is transmitted to the designated left backlight substrate 451, middle backlight substrate 452, and right backlight substrate 453.

  The left backlight substrate 451, the middle backlight substrate 452, and the right backlight substrate 453 light and blink the left backlight 461, the middle backlight 462, and the right backlight 463 by the lamp lighting signal specified by the received system lamp command. , Turn off.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier substrate 500 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

(Effect control board 600a)
The effect control board 600a is connected to the sub control board 400a, and the backlight relay board 450, the amplifier board 500, the effect device drive board 650, and the control panel relay board 700a are connected.

  The effect control board 600 a has a lamp CPU 608, a lamp ROM 609, and a lamp RAM 610 in addition to the same configuration as the effect control board 600 in the first embodiment.

(Liquid crystal control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits a desired command to the lamp CPU 608 in addition to the same function as the liquid crystal control CPU 601 in the first embodiment.

  For example, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an effect specifying command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits a command for causing effect corresponding to the effect specifying command to the VDP 607, and a command for outputting effect sound. Is transmitted to the sound source IC 605, and an effect lamp command for lamp effect is transmitted to the lamp CPU 608.

  Specifically, in the liquid crystal control CPU 601, when the sub CPU 401 determines a character effect (effect that a specific character appears) and receives an effect designating command for designating a character effect, the character effect is executed. Command to the VDP 607. The VDP 607 creates a display list or the like corresponding to the character effect based on this command, and performs processing such as causing the liquid crystal display device 46 to output an effect image.

The liquid crystal control CPU 601 also transmits a command for causing the sound corresponding to the character effect to be generated to the sound source IC 605. The sound source IC 605 causes the sound corresponding to the character effect to be output based on this command.
Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits, to the lamp CPU 608, an effect lamp command for controlling a lamp corresponding to the character effect.

  On the other hand, when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 receives an audio output designation command from the sub CPU 401, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 transmits the audio output designation command to the sound source IC 605.

(Lamp CPU 608)
The lamp CPU 608 is provided on the effect control board 600a. The lamp CPU 608 is provided to read programs and data related to lamp control stored in the lamp ROM 609 and to output lamp signals for lighting, blinking and extinguishing the lamps and LEDs of each display unit. Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp CPU 608 is also configured to output a drive signal or the like of a rendering device or the like.

  Also, upon receiving the system lamp command, the lamp CPU 608 transmits a lamp lighting signal specified by the system lamp command to the backlight relay substrate 450, the rendering device drive substrate 650, and the control panel LED relay substrate 700a.

(Lamp ROM 609)
The lamp ROM 609 is provided on the effect control board 600a. The lamp ROM 609 is provided to store programs and data (lighting pattern and the like) on lamps that are turned on, blinks, and turned off when performing effects. Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp ROM 609 also stores drive patterns and the like of the rendering device and the like.

(Lamp RAM 610)
The lamp RAM 610 is provided on the effect control board 600a. In addition, the lamp RAM 610 functions as a work area for expanding the lighting pattern and the like of the lamp CPU 608, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the lamp ROM 609.

(Rendering device drive board 650)
The effect device drive board 650 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

(Control panel LED relay substrate 700a)
The control panel relay board 700a is connected to the effect control board 600a, and as described above, the command or the like transmitted from the sub control board 400a is received through the effect control board 600a. Further, in the control panel LED relay substrate 700a, the effect button sensor 710s and the cross key substrate 711 are removed from the control panel LED relay substrate 700 in the first embodiment.

(Demonstrator drive relay board 750)
The effect device drive relay substrate 750 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

(Effect button relay board 900)
The sub-control board 400 a is connected to the effect button relay board 900. Further, on the effect button relay board 900, an effect button sensor 710s and a cross key board 711 are provided.

(Effect button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is similar to that of the first embodiment, and is connected to the effect button 21.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key substrate 711 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and is connected to the cross key 22.

  When the sub CPU 401 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment configured as described above receives a command indicating a specific detection result from the main control board 300, it specifies audio data to be output according to the detection result. A system lamp that transmits an audio output specification command of the audio data to (the liquid crystal control CPU 601 of) the presentation control board 600a, identifies a lamp to be lit according to the detection result, and designates lighting of the lamp, etc. The command is transmitted to (the lamp CPU 608 of) the effect control board 600a.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 401 receives a winning combination command or the like from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 401 determines a predetermined effect based on the winning combination command, and produces an effect specifying command specifying the determined effect as the effect control substrate 600a ( To the liquid crystal control CPU 601).

  In the effect control board 600a, when the sound output specification command is received, the sound source IC 605 reads out the sound data specified in the sound output specification command from the sound source ROM 606 or the like, and outputs the sound data from the speaker. When the system lamp command is received, the lamp CPU 608 reads out the lamp data specified in the system lamp command from the lamp ROM 609 or the like, and turns on, blinks, and extinguishes the specified lamp.

  On the other hand, in the effect control board 600a, when the effect specifying command is received, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 reads out the sound control and lamp control necessary for the desired effect from the liquid crystal control ROM 602 etc. based on the effect specifying command. , And causes the lamp CPU 608 to issue a predetermined lamp lighting instruction.

  In the configuration described in the first embodiment where the stop button operation display unit 35 notifies the operation order of the push order bell combination, the lamp emission pattern of the operation order corresponding to the push order bell combination won. By transmitting a system lamp command for designating from the sub control board 400a to the lamp CPU 608, the lamp CPU 608 controls the stop button operation LED board 708 to control the light emission of the stop button operation display unit.

  As described above, according to the present invention, in the first period in the unit game, at the specific timing of notifying the determination result of whether or not to shift to the bonus game after the first period, the normal music is emitted. Up to this point, the reverberation sound was output. By changing the sound output condition of the music in this way, it can be informed that the point to be noticed has arrived, so that it is possible to further notify the player whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to the player. Game fun can be improved.

  Further, in the second period, the operation valid period of the operation means operable by the player is set. As a result, it is possible to notify that the point to be noticed has arrived, together with the change of the sound output situation of the music, so it is possible to further play the game when notifying whether or not to shift to the advantageous state for the player. It can improve the interest.

  Further, when it is determined to shift to the bonus game, the music is output again at a specific timing at which the determination result to shift to the bonus game is notified. Thereby, the notification of transition to the bonus game can be enhanced by the sound output of the music, and the game interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the satisfaction of the predetermined condition means that the operation means has been operated by the player, that the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped and displayed, that the gaming ball has won the prize opening, and the like. Do.

  Note that “sound output” means that (a) music data output from the effect control board 600 is permitted, and (b) the amplifier board 500 is amplified to a level that can be heard by the player. The condition is satisfied, and “do not output sound” means that (c) no output of music data is permitted from the effect control board 600, or (d) output of music data from the effect control board 600 is permitted. The amplifier substrate 500 is not amplified to a level that the player can hear, and the player can not hear the level.

  In the present embodiment, the first bonus state, the second bonus state, and the third bonus state constitute a bonus game advantageous to the player of the present invention. In addition, the bonus game is not limited to these, for example, ART state (RT4 gaming state), bonus gaming state such as big bonus and regular bonus, RT gaming state in which the replay role is established with high probability, operation order of specific role AT gaming state to notify, also, a big hit gaming state in which the winning device is open for a predetermined time, and the gaming ball can enter the ball, a probability variation gaming state in which the winning probability to the big hit gaming state is improved, a closing type winning device The short game state may be applied when the game is released with high probability.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 21 constitutes an operation means operable by the player of the present invention. In addition, an operation means may apply not only the effect button 21 but another operation part. For example, the MAX BET button 8 may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the sound source ROM 606 constitutes music data storage means for storing music data of the present invention. The sound source ROM 606 may store in advance music data (reverberation sound data) to which a reverberation effect is applied.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 constitutes processing means for performing a process of applying a reverberation effect to the music data stored in the music data storage means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43 constitute sound output means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal control CPU 601 is a sound control means for controlling the output of the sound based on the music data through the sound output means based on the music data stored in the music data storage means of the present invention. Configure The sound control means may be carried by the sound source IC 605 or the VDP 607.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 configures notification control means for notifying the determination result as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous bonus game for the player at a specific timing in a unit game.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 constitutes an operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period of the operation means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 constitute a plurality of reels of the present invention in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on the circumferential surface. The plurality of symbols correspond to the symbols shown in FIG. 6 arranged on the respective reels.

  In the present embodiment, the start switch 10 sw constitutes start operation detection means for detecting the start operation by the player according to the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 configures a winning combination determination unit that determines a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 constitute stop operation means provided corresponding to a plurality of reels of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw detect that the stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels of the present invention is operated to stop. The stop operation detection means is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 and the reel control board 150 variably display a plurality of reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit of the present invention, and stop by the stop operation detection unit. The reel control means is configured to stop and display the plurality of reels based on the detection of the operation. The reel control means may be configured only by the main CPU 301.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine used for the reeling type gaming machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a ball ball gaming machine, and an arrange ball gaming machine.

1 game machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal slot 7 BET button 7 sw BET switch 8 MAX BET button 8 sw MAX BET switch 9 settlement button 9 sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10 sw start switch 11 left stop button 11 sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Return button 15 Selector 15s Selector sensor 16s Error release sensor 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Effect button 22 Cross key 23 Display window 24 Start lamp 25 1st BET lamp 26 2nd BET lamp 27 3rd BET lamp 28 storage number indicator 29 payout number indicator 30 can be inserted indicator lamp 31 replay display Amplifier 32 Bonus display unit 33 ART display unit 34 RUSH display unit 35 stop button operation display unit 35L left stop button operation display section 35C in the stop button operation display unit 35R right stop button operation display unit 36 start lever LED
37 waist panel 38 receiver unit 39 medal payout opening 40 left upper speaker 41 left lower speaker 42 right upper speaker 43 right lower speaker 44 setting display section 45 setting change button 45 sw setting change switch 46 liquid crystal display device 47 external concentrated terminal board 48 setting change For key hole 49 sw Setting change key switch 50 Effect device 51 Base part 52 Handle part 53 Sheath part 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 power supply board 201 power button 201 sw power switch 202 hopper 203 auxiliary storage 203s auxiliary storage sensor 204 discharge slit 205 hopper guide member 206 guide member 07 dispensing guide member 250 set the switch board 300 the main control board 301 the main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 main random number generator 400, 400a sub control board 401 sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 sub RAM
404 sub random number generator 450 back light relay board 451 left back light board 452 middle back light board 453 right back light board 461 left back light 462 middle back light 463 right back light 500 amplifier board 600, 600a effect control board 601 liquid crystal control CPU
602 LCD control ROM
603 LCD control RAM
604 CGROM
605 Sound source IC
606 Sound source ROM
607 VDP
650 effect device drive substrate 651 left effect device motor 652s upper left effect device sensor 653s lower left effect device sensor 654 right effect device motor 655s upper right effect device sensor 656s lower right effect device sensor 657 left liquid crystal lift motor 658s upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s lower left liquid crystal lift Sensor 660 Right LCD Lift Motor 661s Right Top LCD Lift Sensor 662s Bottom Right LCD Lift Sensor 700, 700a Panel LED Relay Board 701 MAX BET Button LED Board 702 Stop Button LED Board 703 Effect Button LED Board 704 Lumbar Panel LED Board 705 Bonus Display LED Board 706 ART display LED board 707 RUSH display LED board 708 Stop button operation LED board 709 Start lever LED board 710 Effect button sensor 711 Cross key Board 721 MAX BET button LED
722 Stop button LED
722L Left stop button LED
722C Mid stop button LED
722R Right stop button LED
723 Effect button LED
724 Lumbar panel LED
750 rendering device drive relay substrate 800 rendering device control substrate 801 upper left rendering device substrate 802 lower left rendering device substrate 803 upper right rendering device substrate 804 lower right rendering device substrate 811 upper left rendering device 812 lower left rendering device 813 upper right rendering device 814 lower right rendering device 850 LED control board 851 top LED board 852 corner LED board 853 side LED board 854 saucer side LED board 855 saucer LED board 861 corner LED
862 Top LED
863 Side LED
864 Receiver side LED
865 Receiver LED
900 production button relay board

Claims (2)

In the gaming machine, which determines whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous to the player by establishing the predetermined condition,
Music data storage means for storing normal music data and reverberation sound data;
Sound output means capable of outputting a sound based on the normal music data stored in the music data storage means and a sound based on the reverberation sound data;
Notification control means for notifying a determination result as to whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous to the player at a specific timing in a unit game;
In the first period in the unit game, the sound output means can output a sound based on the normal music data, and in the second period after the first period up to the specific timing, the sound Sound control means capable of outputting sound based on the reverberation sound data from the output means;
Equipped with
The sound output means is
A first specific sound not based on any of the normal music data and the reverberation sound data;
Unlike the first specific sound, it is possible to output a second specific sound not based on any of the normal music data and the reverberation sound data.
The sound control means,
In the second period, it is possible to output a sound based on the reverberation effect sound data without outputting the first specific sound and the second specific sound,
Before Symbol certain timing, it is possible to output one of the first specific sound or the second specific sound without outputting sound based on the reverberation effect sound data,
A game machine characterized by In the gaming machine, which determines whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous to the player by establishing the predetermined condition,
Music data storage means for storing music data;
Processing means for applying a reverberation effect to the music data stored in the music data storage means;
Sound output means capable of outputting a sound based on the music data stored in the music data storage means and a reverberation sound processed by the processing means;
Notification control means for notifying a determination result as to whether or not to shift to a bonus game advantageous to the player at a specific timing in a unit game;
In the first period in the unit game, the sound output means can output a sound based on the music data, and the sound output means in the second period after the first period until the specific timing is reached. Sound control means capable of outputting the reverberation sound processed by the processing means;
Equipped with
The sound output means is
A first specific sound not based on either the music data or the reverberation effect sound;
Unlike the first specific sound, it is possible to output a second specific sound not based on either the music data or the reverberation effect sound,
The sound control means,
In the second period, the reverberation effect can be output without outputting the first specific sound and the second specific sound,
Before Symbol certain timing, it is possible to output one of the first specific sound or the second specific sound without outputting the reverberation effect sound,
A game machine characterized by